DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP … · RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 2 iii Section No. of Pages...

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Prepared For the U.S. Department of Energy, Assistant Secretary for Environmental Management By Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC., PO Box 850, Richland, WA 99352 Contractor For U.S. Department of Energy, Office of River Protection, under Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800

1a. Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 02

1b. Project Number: T2R02 N/A

1 SPF-001 (Rev.0)

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER: Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors. Printed in the United States of America.

Release Stamp

2. Document Title Construction Specification for A/AX-Farm Waste Retrieval Project 3. Design Verification Required Yes No 4. USQ Number N/A 5. PrHA Number N/A PRHA-02041 Rev. 00

6. USQ Screening:

a. Does the change introduce any new failure modes to the equipment? Yes No Basis is required for Yes:

b. Does the change increase the probability of existing failure modes? Yes No Basis is required for Yes:

c. For Safety Significant equipment, does the change require a modification to Chapter 4 of the DSA and/or FRED? Yes No N/A Basis is required for Yes:

7. Description of Change and Justification (Use Continuation pages as needed) Add new subsection to the construction specification as listed on continuation page 4 to support fabrication of the AX Ventilation duct support concrete footings H-14-106856-020. For continuation see page 4. Note: The changes being made do not change the water system so the PE Stamp in Rev. 1 is still valid. .

8. Approvals Title Name Signature Date Clearance Review FENTON, CARRIE L FENTON, CARRIE L 11/25/2015

Design Authority BELLOMY, JIM STEPHENS, RANDALL F for BELLOMY, JIM per telecon

11/24/2015

Design Verifier DEBUIGNE, PAUL B DEBUIGNE, PAUL B 11/24/2015 Checker DEBUIGNE, PAUL B DEBUIGNE, PAUL B 11/24/2015

Document Control Approval HONEYCUTT, COLLEEN HONEYCUTT, COLLEEN 11/25/2015

Originator STEPHENS, RANDALL F STEPHENS, RANDALL F 11/24/2015 Other Approver SCOTT, MARK A DEBUIGNE, PAUL B for SCOTT,

MARK A per telecon 11/24/2015

PrHA Lead SMITH, RYAN D SMITH, RYAN D 11/24/2015 Responsible Engineering Manager BAUER, ROGER E BAUER, ROGER E 11/24/2015

USQ Evaluator SMITH, RYAN D SMITH, RYAN D 11/24/2015

9. Clearance Review: Restriction Type:

Public Undefined Unclassified Controlled Nuclear Information (UCNI) Export Control Information (ECI) Official Use Only Exemption 2-Circumvention of Statute (OUO-2)

Official Use Only Exemption 3-Statutory Exemption (OUO-3) Official Use Only Exemption 4-Commercial/Proprietary (OUO-4) Official Use Only Exemption 5-Privileged Information (OUO-5) Official Use Only Exemption 6-Personal Privacy (OUO-6) Official Use Only Exemption 7-Law Enforcement (OUO-7)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 1 of 297

Nov 25, 2015DATE:

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 02

2 SPF-001 (Rev.0)

10. Distribution: Name Organization ATKINS, LARRY B CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONING BAUER, ROGER E A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG BELLOMY, JIM A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG BRYDEN, MICHAEL J SLUICE-BASED RETRIEVAL ENGRNG DEBUIGNE, PAUL B A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG HOPKINS, GARY P R&C CONSTRUCTION HULL, KEVIN J ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PARKMAN, DAVID B MARS-BASED RETRIEVAL ENGRNG STEPHENS, RANDALL F WITHERSPOON, JP P A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG

11. TBDs or Holds N/A

12. Impacted Documents – Engineering N/A Document Number Rev. Title

13. Other Related Documents N/A Document Number Rev. Title

14. Related Systems, Structures, and Components:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 2 of 297

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 02

3 SPF-001 (Rev.0)

14a. Related Building/Facilities N/A 241-A 241-A-285 241-AX

14b. Related Systems N/A 241-EDS 241-PA 241-RC 241-RW 241-WT

14c. Related Equipment ID Nos. (EIN) N/A A241-PA-V-091 A241-RW-V-088 A241-RW-V-089 A241-RW-V-090 A285-PA-CV-026 A285-PA-CV-028 A285-PA-CV-040 A285-PA-PI-021 A285-PA-PI-022 A285-PA-PRV-027 A285-PA-PRV-034 A285-PA-TI-023 A285-PA-TK-001 A285-PA-V-020 A285-PA-V-025 A285-PA-V-029 A285-PA-V-031 A285-PA-V-035 A285-PA-V-036 A285-PA-V-037 A285-PA-V-039 A285-PA-V-041 A285-PA-V-042 A285-PA-V-055 A285-PA-V-060 A285-PA-V-061 A285-PA-V-064 A285-PA-V-065 A285-RW-PCV-033 A285-RW-PCV-038 A285-RW-PDIT-003 A285-RW-PI-002 A285-RW-PI-005 A285-RW-V-001 A285-RW-V-002 A285-RW-V-004 A285-RW-V-005 A285-RW-V-006 A285-RW-V-007 A285-RW-V-008 A285-RW-V-009 A285-RW-V-010 A285-RW-V-011A A285-RW-V-011B A285-RW-V-011C A285-RW-V-011D A285-RW-V-011E A285-RW-V-014 A285-RW-V-015 A285-RW-V-016 A285-RW-V-049 A285-RW-V-050 A285-RW-V-051 A285-RW-V-052 A285-RW-V-053 A285-RW-V-054 A285-RW-V-056 A285-RW-V-057

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 3 of 297

4 SPF-001 (Rev.0)

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM CONTINUATION SHEET

Document No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 02

Continued from Block 7:

Change Section 03 03 00 Title to “Concrete”.

Change Section 03 03 00, Subsection 2.2.A to “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.

Add new subsection 2.2.B “Pre-Cast Concrete” to SECTION 03 30 00 “CONCRETE”.

Other editorial changes to incorporate changes listed above.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 4 of 297

A-6002-767 (REV 3)

RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 2

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR A/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT

Author Name: RF Stephens Prepared by ARES Corporation for Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC Richland, WA 99352 U.S. Department of Energy Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800 EDT/ECN: DRCF UC: N/A Cost Center: N/A Charge Code: B&R Code: N/A Total Pages: 297 Key Words: 241-AX, 241-A, Construction, Specification, single-shell tank, retrieval, testing, inspection, equipment

Abstract: This specification provides the technical requirements for fabrication, materials, installation, inspection, testing, and handling for equipment and systems required for A/AX-Farms single-shell tank waste retrieval.

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER. Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors.

Release Approval Date Release Stamp

Approved For Public Release

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 5 of 297

Nov 25, 2015DATE:

By Carrie Fenton at 9:11 am, Nov 25, 2015


CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR A/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT

November 2015

prepared by

RF Stephens

prepared for

Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 6 of 297


ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section No. of Pages

Title Pages 2 Table of Contents 2 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Division 01 Sections are under separate cover – see WRPS Statement of Work (SOW) DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 00 Demolition 3 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Section 03 15 00 Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts 3 Section 03 30 00 Concrete 14

DIVISION 05 – METALS Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 7 Section 05 53 00 Metal Gratings 5 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 00 Carpentry 10 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 5 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 91 00 Painting 5 Section 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 7 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 39 Section 13 47 13.13 Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping 9 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 15 00 Compressed Air Piping 11 DIVISION 23 – HVAC Section 23 31 01 Tank Ventilation Ducting 3 Section 23 31 13 Air Compressor Metal Ducts 4

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 7 of 297


iii

Section No. of Pages

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 15 Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 9 Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 6 Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 13 Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 8 Section 26 10 00 Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution 11 Section 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 6 Section 26 24 13 Switchboards 4 Section 26 24 16 Panelboards 6 Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 5 Section 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 4 Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 3 Section 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 6 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 18 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 10 00 Water Utilities 14 DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION Section 40 05 13 Process Piping 16 Section 40 05 22 Hose in Hose Transfer Line System Installation 8 Section 40 41 00 Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing 5 Section 40 42 00 Process Piping and Equipment Insulation 5

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 8 of 297


iv

CERTIFICATION I certify that the indicated sections of this Specification were prepared by me or under my supervision and that I am a registered architect/professional engineer under

the laws of the State of Washington.

Civil

Section 33 10 00 - Utilities

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 9 of 297


02 41 00 - 1

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.

A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

29 CFR Part 1910.94 Occupational Health and Environmental Control, Subpart G, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

29 CFR Part 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

B. Hanford Documents

TFC-ESHQ-FP-C-01 Tank Farm Contractor Hot Work Permit

TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavatin, Trenching, and Shoring

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014®1 National Electrical Code®1 (NEC®1)

NFPA 70E®1 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

D. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

Title 173, Department of Ecology, Chapter 173-303, Dangerous Waste Regulations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.

1 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, NEC and NFPA 70E are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 10 of 297


02 41 00 - 2

1.3 PERMITS

A. Obtain and conspicuously post the following before starting work under this Section.

1. Hot Work Permit. Use TFC-ESHQ-FP-C-01, Tank Farm Contractor Hot Work Permit (Form A-6003-692).

2. Excavation Permit (for buried items) supplied by Project/System Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before beginning cutting or demolition, survey existing work and examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine extent of work. Coordinate work of this Section with other work.

B. Determine if any type of chemicals, gases, flammable materials, or other dangerous materials have been used in pipes or other equipment based on job hazard evaluation or Excavation Permit. Remove these materials prior to demolition activity as directed by Project/System Engineer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Personnel Protection: Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, and temporary closures required for protection of construction personnel and others during demolition and removal operations.

B. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded as a result of cutting, removal, or demolition. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required.

C. Disconnect existing utility services specified by Washington River Protection Solutions (WRPS) Engineering Change Notice (ECN) or Mission Support Alliance Engineering Change Request (ECR). If no direction is included in an ECN or ECR, proceed as directed by Project/System Engineer.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Control amount of dust resulting from demolition to prevent spread of dust and to avoid creation of dust in surrounding area. Do not use water if ice, flooding, or pollution could occur. Follow requirements of state Waste Discharge Permit ST4511.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 11 of 297


02 41 00 - 3

B. Demolition Operations.

1. Remove equipment from tanks in accordance with applicable Work Packages, ECNs, and required work controls, such as Radiological Work Permit (RWP).

2. Dispose of debris in accordance with Contract Statement of Work requirements.

END OF SECTION 02 41 00

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 12 of 297


03 15 00 - 1

SECTION 03 15 00

POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLTS

PART 1 GENERAL




A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities

B. International Code Council (ICC)

ESR-1917 Hilti®2 Kwik Bolt TZ Carbon and Stainless Steel Anchors in Concrete

ESR-1546 Hilti HDA Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Undercut Anchors for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete

IBC International Building Code

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.

B. Approval Required

1. Training Records (Paragraph 1.3.A): 5 days before installation.

2. Special Inspection Qualifications (Paragraph 1.3.C): 5 days before start of installation.

3. Installation Reports (Paragraph 3.4.A): Within 10 days after work is complete Form, A-6004-239.

2 Hilti is a registered trademark of Hilti Corporation, Schaan, Liechtenstein.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 13 of 297


03 15 00 - 2

C. Approval Not Required

1. Drawings, Diagrams, Templates, and Instructions: Within 10 days after work is complete.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall train post-installed anchor installers. Installers shall be trained to the anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions, design document requirements, and the anchor installation report. Contractor shall deliver installer training records to the Company.

B. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

C. Post-Installed Anchor Special Inspector Qualifications.

1. Two years’ experience in concrete inspection and/or certification from American Concrete Institute, ICC, International Conference of Building Officials, or other recognized concrete inspection agency to be provided by the Tank Operations Contractor (TOC).

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Post-installed anchors (PC-2, PC-1, and PC-0): Industry standard wedge-type having a published evaluation report (by ICC Evaluation Services, Inc.), with anchor descriptions, tables of allowable tension and shear loads (including seismic and wind qualifications), and test findings.

B. Hilti Corporation or approved equal:

1. Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.

2. HDA Metric Undercut Anchor.

C. Anchors located in dry, interior locations may be carbon steel. Anchors located in wet or potentially wet interior locations (e.g., water building installations) and exterior locations shall be stainless steel.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 14 of 297


03 15 00 - 3

D. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where expansion anchors are to be installed and notify the Company, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. For expansion anchors larger than 3/8 in., locate rebar by scanning before drilling. For expansion anchors 3/8 in. or smaller, avoid cutting rebar by using a drill with a concealed-metal detector shutoff.

B. Do not install anchors in concrete prior to 28 days after concrete placement unless it can be shown by testing that the concrete design strength has been obtained.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Anchor Installation

1. Install anchors shown on the Drawings in accordance with training.

2. Notify the Project/System Engineer if reinforcing steel is encountered when drilling.

3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Special Inspection is required for all anchor bolt installations. This shall be done in accordance with Section 4 of the applicable ICC Evaluation Report. The special inspector shall be on the jobsite during anchor installation to verify anchor type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaning procedures, anchor spacing, edge distances, drill bit size, anchor embedment and tightening torque. Complete inspections shall be documented by the inspector on Expansion Anchor Installation Report (Form A-6004-239) (or Company approved equivalent) and submitted to the Buyer for approval.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 15 of 297


03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Formwork.

B. Reinforcement.

C. Cast-In-Place Items.

D. Mixture Design.

E. Placement Procedures

F. Cast-in-Place Concrete.

G. Pre-Cast Concrete.

H. Finishes for pre-engineered metal buildings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Grating.”

B. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”

C. Section 13 34 19, “Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings.”

D. Section 31 23 00, “Earthwork.”

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS



A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials

ACI 237R Self-Consolidating Concrete

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 16 of 297


03 30 00 - 2

ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings

ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting

ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary

ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

ACI CP-1 Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician-Grade 1

B. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished

ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A853 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use

ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 17 of 297


03 30 00 - 3

ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

Manual of Standard Practice

D. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)

QC Manual – Section 3 Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities

E. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code-Steel

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.

B. Approval Required.

1. Concrete Data: Before mixing, submit concrete materials, mix design, and mix proportions, in accordance with ACI 301. Identify each material to be used in concrete, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic yard of plastic mix.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 18 of 297


03 30 00 - 4

2. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication of reinforcement, submit placement drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bars sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

3. Setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions: Prior to fabrication, submit information for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

4. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance for cast-in-place anchors indicating they meet the requirements of this Specification.

5. Concrete Placement drawings: Prior to setting of forms, submit placement drawings indicating planned pouring sequence and locations of any planned joints, including those not shown on the Contract drawings.

6. Concrete curing procedure: Before mixing, submit a description of materials and methods of curing, in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6.

7. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete will be placed during cold weather, submit procedures meeting requirements of ACI 301, Section 4.2 and ACI 306.1. If concrete will not be placed during cold weather, submit a statement to that effect.

8. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete will be placed during hot weather, submit a procedures meeting requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.7 and 5.3.2.1.c. If concrete will not be placed during hot weather, submit a statement to that effect.

9. Product data of non-shrink grout.

10. Submittals shall include the documentation listed in Paragraph 1.4.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Field Quality Control Reports:

a. Pre-Pour Inspection: The concrete pre-pour inspection checklist shall be prepared and signed off prior to any concrete pouring. See Paragraph 3.3.B. The inspection checklist shall include inspection of the following items prior to pouring concrete: forms, concrete thickness, re-bar size and placement, bonding electrode placement, subgrade, embedments, weather conditions, concrete mix,

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 19 of 297


03 30 00 - 5

concreting procedures, testing requirements, and other items that may need inspection.


A. Certification of Concrete Production Facility.

B. The concrete supplier shall be certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities,” with compliance to ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Qualification of Concrete Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including equipment, personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1077 and shall be accredited by an independently recognized authority within the last two years to perform the work described in this Section.

D. Pour Slip: The concrete pour slip shall be signed off prior to any concrete pouring. The pour slip shall include inspection of the following items prior to pouring concrete; forms, re-bar, subgrade, embedments, and other items that may need inspection.

E. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with Contract Documents.

Document Paragraph

Supplier Certification 1.5.A

Laboratory Qualifications 1.5.B

Inspection Personnel Qualification Records 1.6.A

Pre-Pour Inspection Checklist and Trip Tickets 1.6.B & 3.3.B.1.d

Concrete Test Results 3.7.D

F. Perform work in accordance with the applicable sections of ACI 117, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

G. Suspect and Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

1.6 QUALIFICATION OF CONCRETE INSPECTORS

A. Personnel performing field testing of concrete shall be ACI Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade 1, who have received formal certification in accordance with ACI CP-1 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs shall

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 20 of 297


03 30 00 - 6

include requirements for written and performance examination as stipulated in ACI 301, Section 1.6.2.

B. Pre-Pour Inspection: The concrete pre-pour inspection checklist shall be prepared and signed off prior to any concrete pouring. The inspection checklist shall include inspection of the following items prior to pouring concrete: forms, re-bar, subgrade, embedments, and other items that may need inspection.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

B. Steel reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture dirt, oil, sunlight, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTION

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260, Sika Chemical Company “SIKA AER,” Chem-Masters Corporation “Adz-Air,” or Protex Industries “AES.”

4. Properties:

a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4500 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: 4 in. in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.2.

c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 301, Table 4.2.2.4.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, and ASTM C94.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 21 of 297


03 30 00 - 7

e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 and ACI 301, Section 4.1.2.10.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Pre-Cast Concrete

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type III (low alkali).

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260, Sika Chemical Company “SIKA AER,” Chem-Masters Corporation “Adz-Air,” or Protex Industries “AES.”

4. Properties:

a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4500 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 237R.

c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 237R.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 237R, and ASTM C94.

e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 and ACI 237R.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

C. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): Portland cement based, minimum compressive strength of 100 psi at 28 days, maximum compressive strength of 300 psi at 28 days.

D. Reinforcing Steel

1. Steel bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60.

2. Tie wire: ASTM A853 carbon steel, 16-gage minimum, annealed.

3. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type in flat sheets.

E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

F. Non-shrink Grout

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 22 of 297


03 30 00 - 8

1. In accordance with ASTM C1107

2. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days, and 9,000 psi at 28 days.

G. Embedded Plates: See Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

H. Headed Weld Stud Anchors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

I. Cast-In-Place Anchors: ASTM F593 CW2 threaded rods with ASTM F594 nuts.

J. Post-Installed Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

K. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D1751; asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2-in. thick.

L. Joint sealants: See Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants.”

M. Forms: Wood, steel, plywood or Masonite Corporation “Concrete Form Presdwood,” as required for various specified finishes.

1. Form facing panels shall provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

2. Form release agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

N. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion appropriate for bonding fresh concrete to existing set concrete.

O. Special Coatings: See Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings,” for concrete coating. Extent of coating shall be as shown on Drawings.

P. Waterstops: Self-expanding Butyl Strip, manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 in.

Q. Special Coatings: See Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings,” for concrete coating. Extent of coating shall be as shown on Drawings.

2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 23 of 297


03 30 00 - 9

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Form Construction

1. Install formwork in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3 to support vertical, lateral, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

2. Construct formwork such that interior shape and rigidity of finished concrete will meet requirements of the Drawings and approved shop drawings within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 4.

3. Prepare form surfaces in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2 using specified form coating materials, or as described below.

4. Forms for surfaces which will be permanently concealed from view may be saturated with water, before placing concrete, instead of other treatment. In freezing weather, forms shall be treated with oil or stearate.

5. Clean forms of foreign material before placing concrete.

B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items as required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. All embedded items shall be securely supported to prevent displacement during concrete placement and finishing.

C. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. Document inspection on pour slip.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing Steel

1. Fabricate and place bars to dimensions shown on Contract drawings, within tolerances shown in ACI 117, Sections 2.1 and 2.2.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 24 of 297


03 30 00 - 10

2. Place as shown on Drawings, within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 2.2 and ACI 301, Section 3.3.2.

3. Tie to prevent displacement during placement of concrete.

4. Do not force into concrete after initial set has started.

5. Provide concrete cover for reinforcement protection per dimensions given in ACI 301, Section 3.3, except where shown otherwise on Contract drawings or approved shop drawings.

6. Reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads, or placement of concrete beyond specified tolerances. Reinforcement supported from ground shall rest on precast, square concrete blocks, with a minimum surface area of 4 in2 and having a compressive strength equal to specified compressive strength of concrete being placed.

B. Concrete

1. Before placing:

a. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete, and that required inspections have been performed. Document inspection on pour slip.

b. Contractor shall develop a Concrete Pre-Pour Checklist. Checklist shall be reviewed with the Buyer’s Construction Engineer prior to placing concrete. At a minimum, the checklist shall include:

i Formwork placement.

ii Earth compaction.

iii Reinforcement placement.

iv Embedded items.

v Bonding electrode.

vi Concrete Mix.

vii Testing Requirements.

viii Weather conditions.

ix Approval of all submittals prior to pour.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 25 of 297


03 30 00 - 11

x Availability of associated materials and labor.

Note: Use separate checklist for each day and each concrete mix.

c. Approve “Pour Slip,” including identification of sections of structure to be placed, maximum size of coarse aggregate, and design strength.

d. For each truck load, collect “Trip Ticket.” “Trip Tickets” shall contain information listed in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cement ratio.

e. Discharge concrete rinsate at Company-approved location.

f. Place in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3. Do not drop more than 5 ft.

g. Temper only as permitted in ACI 301, Section 4.3.

2. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, Section 4.3.

a. Addition of water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94.

b. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range, water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

3. Before test sampling and placing concrete, batch/trip ticket shall be reviewed by the Testing Agency’s field inspector. After depositing concrete, batch ticket shall be completed and submitted.

4. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.

a. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

b. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40°F, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

c. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

5. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and as follows:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 26 of 297


03 30 00 - 12

a. Maintain concrete temperature below 90°F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.

b. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

6. Place nonshrink grout where shown on Contract drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

7. Placing concrete against subgrade/base material: Place on or against firm, damp surfaces free of frost, ice, and free water. Obtain required earth compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,” before concrete placement. Dampen earth surfaces to receive fresh concrete.

8. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.5.

a. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

b. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

c. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

d. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains/trenches where required.

9. Form Removal and Concrete Repair

a. Form removal: Remove in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3.2 and 2.3.4.

b. Cut back form ties and examine concrete surfaces for defects. Repair only after permission for patching is given by the Project/System Engineer.

c. Place concrete repair mortar within 1 hour after mixing. Do not re-temper mortar.

d. Repair surface defects in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.7. Cure concrete repairs same as new concrete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 27 of 297


03 30 00 - 13

10. Concrete Finishes and Tolerances

a. Measuring for tolerances shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.3.

b. Formed surfaces: Start finishing following concrete repair and complete within 96 hours after forms have been removed. Finish in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.3.3.

i Surfaces exposed to earth backfill; Rough form finish.

ii Exterior surfaces exposed to weather.

iii Repair and patch tie holes and defects.

iv Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

v Surfaces to receive special protective coating (ACI 301, Section 5.3.3.4.b).

c. Unformed surfaces: Finish in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.

i Exterior equipment slabs subject to foot traffic.

3.4 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand- or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and is uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 28 of 297


03 30 00 - 14

3.5 JOINTS

A. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construction contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatter-proof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-in. wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Maximum 12 hours after placement.

3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6. Clear curing compounds shall be tinted or applied to surfaces marked to show extent of spraying.

C. Do not use curing compound on surfaces to receive special protective coating.

D. Protect concrete during adverse weather conditions in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8.

E. Protect concrete from mechanical damage in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8


A. Sample and test concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2 (d), (e), and (f), (g), and (h). Record results. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests.

B. Engage a special inspector and qualified independent testing agency to perform field material evaluation tests and inspections, and prepare testing and inspection reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Headed bolts and studs.

3. Verification of use of required concrete design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 29 of 297


03 30 00 - 15

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests:

1. Testing of concrete samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ACI 301, Section 1.6.4.2.d and ASTM C172.

2. Testing shall be performed according to ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2.(e), (f), (g), and (h). Record results.

E. Provide nonshrink grout cube molds onsite. Non-shrink grout cubes shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 30 of 297


05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL




A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations

B. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)

ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing

C. ASTM International (ASTM)


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 31 of 297


05 50 00 - 2

ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

ASTM F844 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel

AWS QC1 Certification of Welding Inspectors

E. Hanford Documents


TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.


1. Welding personnel qualifications: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit 2 copies of welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 32 of 297


05 50 00 - 3

2. Welding procedure qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit 2 copies of welding procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.

3. Examination personnel qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit 2 copies of examination personnel qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.2.

4. Examination procedures: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit 2 copies of examination procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.3.

5. Carbon Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.1.

6. Sheet Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.2.

7. Stainless Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.3.

8. Weld Examinations (PT, MT) as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.4.

C. Approval Not Required: None.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Qualifications of Welding Personnel and Procedures

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 for steel structures, AWS D1.3 for sheet steel, and AWS D1.6 for stainless steel before welding. Qualification of welding personnel and procedures in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section IX may be substituted for components welded in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.3, and D1.6. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder performance qualification test results and renewal of qualification documentation at jobsite. Where stainless steel materials are welded to carbon steel, AWS D1.1 procedures shall govern, unless ASME B&PVC, Section IX was substituted.

2. Qualification of examination personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.

a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 33 of 297


05 50 00 - 4

shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

3. Examination procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1.4 PERMITS

A. Obtain and conspicuously post the following permits before starting work under this Section.

1. Hot Work Permit: See the Contract Statement of Work.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

Use the following materials unless otherwise shown on Contract drawings:

A. Rolled Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992, Gr. 50.

B. Stainless Steel Shapes and Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304L.

C. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304, 304L.

D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304L (SMLS).

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (black) Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B, standard weight, Schedule 40.

F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

G. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653

H. Fasteners

1. Bolts

a. ASTM A325.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 34 of 297


05 50 00 - 5

2. Nuts

a. ASTM A563, Grade C, plain, heavy hex.

3. Washers: ASTM F436 Type 1, plain.

4. Expansion Anchor Installations: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

5. Weld studs: Nelson Stud Welding Co. Type H4L or approved substitute.

I. Welding Electrodes/Filler Metal:

1. Carbon steel – Matching filler metal with Fu = 70,000 psi.

2. Stainless steel - E308/ER308 or E309/ER309.

J. Nonshrink Grout: See Section 03 30 00, “Cast-In-Place Concrete.”

K. Special Protective Coating: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”

L. Zinc-rich Coating: Sherwin Williams “Zinc Clad®3 200,” or ZRC Products Company “Z.R.C.®4“

M. Supports: Channels, channel spring nuts, bolts, and fittings for any one support type shall be galvanized and from the same manufacturer. Cooper B-Line®5 channels and fittings, or approved substitute.

1. Channels: 1 5/8-in. wide by 1 5/8-in. deep, or as shown on Drawings.

2. Channel spring nuts: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Bolts (for use with channel spring nuts): Manufacturer’s standard.

4. Support Clamps (for rigid steel conduit): Manufacturer’s standard.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.

3 Zinc Clad is a registered trademark of SWIMC, Newark, Delaware. 4 Z.R.C. is a registered trademark of Norfolk Corporation, Marshfield, Massachusetts. 5 B-Line is a registered trademark of Cooper Technologies Company, Houston, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 35 of 297


05 50 00 - 6

2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and stainless steel in accordance with AWS D1.6.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Touch up damaged zinc surfaces with zinc-rich coating. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where metal fabrications are to be installed and notify Project/System Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate with Project/System Engineer for delivery of items to Site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Anchor Installation: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

B. Install metal fabrications plumb, level, or as shown on the Drawings.

C. Make field connections as neatly as possible with joints flush and smooth. Grind smooth exposed field welds before field painting. Repair welds in galvanized work with 2 coats of zinc-rich coating.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 36 of 297


05 50 00 - 7

D. Assemble and install interchangeable channel supports in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Torque bolts used with channel spring nuts in support channels and clamps per manufacturer instructions (B-Line torque requirements shown).

Bolt size, inches Torque, ft-lb 1/4 6 – 9

5/16 11 – 17 3/8 19 – 30 1/2 50 – 75

Unless specified on the design drawings, torque the bolts in accordance with Tank Farm maintenance procedure 2-MISC-049 Bolt Torquing Guidelines.

E. Weld Studs: Installation, testing and welder qualification shall be in accordance

with the manufacturers’ written instructions, and AWS D1.1, Section 7 for carbon steel and AWS D1.6, Section 7 for stainless steel.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. After installation has been completed, clean and paint connections with primer. Touch-up shop prime coat wherever damaged. Repair breaks in galvanized coating with zinc-rich coating.


A. Weld Examination

1. Perform visual examination of carbon steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Sections 6.5.5 and 6.9 (statically loaded structures). Record examination results.

2. Perform visual examination for sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, Section 6.1. Record examination results.

3. Perform visual examination of stainless steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.1 (statically loaded structures). Record examination results.

4. Perform magnetic particle examination (MT) where shown on the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 6.12 and 6.10, respectively. Perform liquid penetrant (PT) examination where shown on the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.4 (statically loaded). Record examination results.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 37 of 297


05 53 00 - 1

SECTION 05 53 00

METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Labor, materials, equipment as shown on the Drawings, and specified herein, to furnish and install metal bar gratings.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Steel, Stainless Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)


ASTM A510 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel


ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damages and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 38 of 297


05 53 00 - 2

ASTM A1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM A1018 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM F1941 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners [Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN/UNR)]

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI)

Architectural Painting Specification Manual

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

Paint Specification No. 20 Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, “Inorganic,” and Type II,”Organic”)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, anchor details, and standard installation details.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 and ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 (or ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531).

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 39 of 297


05 53 00 - 3

1.7 PERMITS

Not used.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. Note: No documentation is required since the U.S. Green Building Council allows a default value of 25 percent to be used for steel without documentation.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36 or Steel Strip, ASTM A1011 or ASTM A1018.

D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510.

E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011, Structural Steel, Grade 30.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, Structural Quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5. Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping structural fasteners.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer5: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat. Primer is not to be used for galvanized steel.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 40 of 297


05 53 00 - 4

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in. unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Welded Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing, Depth, and Thickness: As Shown.

2. Crossbar Spacing: As Shown.

3. Traffic Surface: Plain.

4. Loading: At a uniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection shall not exceed 1/4 in. over the required span.

5. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.

B. Grating Sections: All grating shall be banded. Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.

C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating grating.

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.

D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. The finish galvanizing of gratings, frames, and supports shall be applied after the required fabrication of assembly is complete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 41 of 297


05 53 00 - 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The grating shall be received at the job site by the Contractor, unloaded, and protected from damage prior to the requirement for it to be installed.

B. Cutting, fitting, and placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting as required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels.

C. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

D. All grating shall be removable. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 42 of 297


06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00

CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Material and fabrication requirements for temporary work platforms for use in Tank Farms.





ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws - Inch Series

ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series)


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength


ASTM D5055 Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 43 of 297


06 10 00 - 2

ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples

C. APA-The Engineered Wood Association

Engineered Wood Construction Guide

D. Hanford Documents

DOE/RL-92-36 Hanford Site Hoisting and Rigging Manual

RPP-RPT-47003 Temporary Structures Wind Tie-Down Guide

E. International Code Council (ICC)

IBC Table 1607.1 and Chapter 23, Wood

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.


A. Deliver products bundled or crated to provide adequate protection during transit and job storage, with required grade marks clearly identifiable. Inspect wood products for damage upon delivery. Remove and replace damaged materials.

B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks, and under temporary coverings.

C. Protect sheet materials during handling to prevent breaking of corners and damage to surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER

A. Lumber shall consist of Douglas fir No. 2 (or better) structural joists and planks.

B. Lumber shall be exterior type for use in exterior locations.

C. All wood shall be fire-retardant-treated per IBC, Section 2303.2 or shall be treated with post treatment, exterior, clear drying, Class A fire retardant.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated (Paragraph 3.1.D) that comply with requirements specified in this specification or manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 44 of 297


06 10 00 - 3

B. Provide fasteners with hot-dip, zinc-coating per ASTM A153.

C. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Metal framing fittings: Simpson Strong-Tie®6 or similar. Fittings shall have a minimum G90 zinc galvanized coating.

H. Post bases: Simpson Strong-Tie AB/ABA/ABE/ABU Adjustable and Standoff Post Bases or similar. Post bases shall have a minimum G90 zinc galvanized coating.

2.3 PLATFORM GRATING AND STAIR TREADS

A. Platform decking and stair treads shall be pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) with slip resistant walking surface, size I-6010 minimum. Color shall be gray or yellow.

B. FRP grating and stair treads shall be flame retardant in accordance ASTM E84 with a Class 1 flame spread index of less than 25.

C. Clips shall be stainless steel and of appropriate type for use with pultruded FRP grating and stair treads.

2.4 PIPE

A. Pipe shall be ASTM A53, Grade B.

2.5 CONCRETE BLOCKS

A. Concrete blocks in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.

B. Pier blocks shall be standard concrete precast type.

C. Ecology blocks shall be standard concrete precast type, minimum 2 ft x 2 ft x 3 ft (~1800 lb).

2.6 WIRE ROPE AND HARDWARE

A. Wire rope and hardware in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.

6 Simpson Strong-Tie is a registered trademark of Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. Pleasanton, California.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 45 of 297


06 10 00 - 4

B. Wire rope shall be 3/8-in. IPS independent wire rope core (IWRC).

C. Turnbuckle shall be drop forged, hot dipped galvanized, jaw & jaw type, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.

D. Anchor shackles shall be screw pin type, galvanized, forged heat treated with allow pin, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.

E. Thimbles shall be heavy duty, galvanized thimbles, sized to fit wire rope.

F. Eye bolts shall be forged steel, hot dipped galvanized after threading (UNC), with hot dipped galvanized, heavy-hex nuts, with a minimum allowable load limit of 2,000 lbs. Use 3/4-in. diameter shaft maximum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Platform must be erected, altered, and dismantled by, or under the supervision of qualified personnel.

B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.

D. Securely assemble rough carpentry work and attach to substrate by anchoring and fastening in accordance with IBC Table 2304.9.1, Fastening Schedule.

E. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.

F. Do not splice structural members between supports.

G. The spacing between uprights must not exceed 8 ft.

H. Each upright must be continuous (no butt joints with splice plates).

I. Adjacent uprights must be connected with horizontal bearers/ledgers to ensure that the unbraced vertical length of an upright does not exceed 8 ft.

J. For two story platforms or platforms with floor heights greater than 4 ft, the platform must be supported in two directions by a system of diagonal cross braces secured to the upright as close to the bearers/ledgers as possible.

K. The maximum floor height for any platform is 16 ft above grade.

L. Install/apply all materials and equipment per manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 46 of 297


06 10 00 - 5

M. The overall length or width of any single level on a platform may not exceed 16 ft.

3.2 DIMENSIONS

A. Member must have minimum nominal dimensions as follows:

1. Uprights:

a. 4 in. x 4 in. for uprights up to 8-ft maximum floor height.

b. 6 in. x 6 in. for uprights between 8-ft and 16-ft maximum floor height.

2. Ledgers/Bearers: 2 in. x 12 in., 8-ft maximum span.

3. Joists:

a. 2 in. x 6 in., 8-ft maximum unsupported length.

b. 2 in. x 10 in., 12-ft maximum unsupported length.

c. 2 in. x 12 in.:

i With 16-in. spacing or less, 16-ft maximum unsupported length.

ii With spacing up to 24”, 14-ft maximum unsupported length.

4. Braces: 1 in. x 6 in. or 2 in. x 4 in.

5. Guardrail (top rail): The top rail shall consist of two members. 2 in. x 4 in. member, flush with the top of the vertical posts, 2 in. side up, with 2 in. x 6 in. member fastened to the top of each perimeter post and resting on the 2 in. x 4 in. top rail member, 6 in. side up.

6. Guardrail (intermediate rail): 2 in. x 4 in. Intermediate rail shall be fastened to posts on interior side of deck such that the platform worker loads will not create pullout loading on the fasteners.

7. Handrail: See STAIR FRAMING, Paragraph 3.4.

8. Toeboards: 1 in. x 4 in. (minimum).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 47 of 297


06 10 00 - 6

3.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1 1/2 in. of bearing on wood. Attach floor joists as follows:

1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors/hangers.

2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers or, by using metal joist hangers.

B. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 in. from top or bottom.

C. Provide solid blocking of 2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band.

D. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 in. or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports.

E. Provide bridging between joists of type indicated below, at intervals of 96-in. o.c.

1. Form diagonal wood bridging from bevel cut 1 by 3-in. nominal size lumber, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists.

F. Joists shall be spaced a maximum of 24-in. o.c.

3.4 STAIR FRAMING

A. Construct stairs as opposed to ladders or ramps for worker safety, decreased wind loading, and to minimize interference with surrounding equipment.

B. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with the following requirements:

1. Stringer Size: 2 by 12-in. nominal size minimum.

2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3 1/2 in. of effective depth.

3. Stringer Spacing: Two stringers for stair widths up to 24 in. Three stringers for stair width between 24 in. and 36 in. Four stringers for stair width between 36 in. and 48 in.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 48 of 297


06 10 00 - 7

C. Provide stair framing that does not exceed the following variations between treads and risers within each flight:

1. Adjacent treads and risers: 3/16 in.

2. Between largest and smallest treads and risers: 3/8 in.

D. Stair treads shall be a minimum of 10 in. deep.

E. Stairways shall have a minimum clear width of 22 in.

F. Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal of between 30 and 50 degrees. Any uniform combination of rise/tread dimensions may be used that will result in a stairway at an angle to the horizontal within the permissible range.

G. All treads shall be reasonably slip-resistant and the nosings shall be of non-slip finish. Rise height and tread width shall be uniform (within tolerances provided above) throughout any flight of stairs including any foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs.

H. Stairway platforms shall be no less than the width of a stairway and a minimum of 30 in. in length measured in the direction of travel.

I. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to an overhead obstruction shall be at least 7 ft measured from the leading edge of the tread.

J. Handrails

1. Standard handrails shall be provided on the open sides of all exposed stairways and stair platforms. Handrails shall be provided on at least one side of closed stairways preferably on the right side descending.

2. Handrail shall consist of a lengthwise member mounted directly on a wall or partition by means of brackets attached to the lower side of the handrail so as to offer no obstruction to a smooth surface along the top and both sides of the handrail.

3. The handrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling. Handrails shall be graspable and shall have a diameter of at least 1.25 in. and not greater than 2 in. If the handrail is not circular, it shall have a perimeter dimension of at least 4 in and not greater than 6.25 in. with a maximum cross section dimension of 2.25 in. Edges shall have a minimum radius of 0.01 in.

4. The ends of the handrail should be turned in to the supporting frame or otherwise arranged so as not to constitute a projection hazard.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 49 of 297


06 10 00 - 8

5. The height of handrails shall not be more than 34 in. nor less than 30 in. from upper surface of handrail to surface of tread in line with face of riser or to surface of ramp.

6. The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed structure is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 lbs applied in any direction at any point on the rail.

7. All handrails shall be provided with a clearance of not less than 1.5 in. between the handrail and any other object.

3.5 GUARDRAILS

A. A work platform 30 in. or more above grade level must have 42-in. guardrails around all parts of the platform (except stair opening).

B. Regardless of height, open-sided platforms above or adjacent to dangerous equipment shall be guarded with a standard railing and toe board.

C. A standard guardrail shall consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts, and shall have a vertical height of 42-in. nominal from upper surface of top rail to top of platform walking surface. The top rail shall be smooth-surfaced throughout the length of the railing. The intermediate rail shall be approximately halfway between the top rail and the platform. The ends of the rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard. The perimeter upright posts shall be incorporated into the guardrail.

D. The guardrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling.

E. Toe boards shall be provided wherever, beneath the open sides,

1. Person can pass,

2. There is moving machinery, or

3. There is equipment with which falling materials could create a hazard.

F. A standard toe board shall be 4-in. minimum in vertical height from its top edge to the platform walking surface. It shall be securely fastened in place and with not more than 1/4-in. clearance above floor level.

3.6 OPENINGS IN THE WORK PLATFORM AREA

A. Openings in the work platform area may not exceed a diameter greater than 6 in. more than the diameter of the riser which protrudes through the platform area.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 50 of 297


06 10 00 - 9

B. All other openings may not exceed 11 in. x 17 in. unless fall protection (gated if necessary) is constructed to surround the hole.

C. Openings in the floor which are not in use shall be covered with grating (I-6010) or board sufficient to support the designated live loads. The temporary floor cover must be conspicuously covered and shall not exceed 3/4 in. over the surrounding floor height in order to prevent a tripping hazard.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

A. The structure base must consist of gravel (min. 3-in. deep) which extends at least 12 in. beyond the perimeter of the structure in all directions.

B. All upright posts must be set on a pier block (12-in. x 12-in. min. base) using a post base.

C. Install fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions using recommended clips. Hold-down clips shall be provided and spaced at a maximum of 4 ft apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer. After fabrication, all cut ends, holes, and abrasions of FRP grating shall be sealed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using a resin comparable to the grating resin.

D. Existing equipment.

1. Install the platform such that there is sufficient clearance between the platform and the equipment such that the equipment is accessible for modification, repair, adjustment, etc.

2. Existing equipment insulation may be removed provided that after the platform structure is installed, the insulation is reinstalled or an equivalent form of insulation is provided by the platform structure.

3. Care shall be taken to ensure that installation, removal, or regular use of the platform structure will not interfere or cause damage to the existing equipment.

E. Tie-Downs

1. Tie-downs shall be used at a minimum of four opposite corners of all structures that have a total height to width ratio (overall width – short side) greater than 1.

2. Tie-downs for temporary structures should follow RPP-RPT-47003.

3. Tie-downs shall consist of wire rope, turnbuckles, and anchor shackles.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 51 of 297


06 10 00 - 10

4. Tie-downs shall be connected to corner post eye-bolts and to ecology blocks.

5. Eye-bolts shall be located as close as possible to, but lower than, the top floor rim joist.

6. Eye-bolts shall be placed through the center of the post, using washers and nuts as recommended by manufacturer.

7. Ecology blocks shall be placed:

a. Minimizing interference with surrounding equipment.

b. Minimizing interference with facility activities.

c. As close to the platform as possible.

d. Using one ecology block per tie-down.

3.8 ALLOWABLE LIVE LOADS

A. The allowable live loads are as follows:

1. Platform floor live load – 60 psf. On every platform assembly the allowable floor live load shall be applied in a conspicuous place. Such markings shall not be removed or defaced.

2. Stair live load.

a. 100 psf.

b. 300 lb concentrated load at center of tread.

3. Handrail live load

a. 50 plf applied at any direction at the top handrail.

b. 200 lb at any point at top of rail or stanchion.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 52 of 297


07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.

B. Sealant and backing materials.

1.2 REFERENCES


A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 40, Protection of Environment – Part 59

National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products


ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM C1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants

ASTM D6690 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements

ASTM D994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.


1. Catalog Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including, preparation instructions and recommendations, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, as well as installation methods. Additional information to include Material Safety Data Sheet, shelf life, and temperature range of storage and application.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 53 of 297


07 92 00 - 2


A. Installer qualifications: Trained and/or experienced in the application of the use of sealants to be used.

B. Source limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Comply with the Contract Statement of Work.

B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging, with labels intact, until ready for installation.

C. Store products off ground; if stored on roof, do not exceed structural capacity of deck.

D. Store materials at minimum of 68°F for at least 24 hours prior to installation, regardless of temperature at location.

E. Do not allow materials to freeze prior to application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: – Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for volatile organic compound content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Sealant: Polysulphide base, single component, chemical curing; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstand movement up to 20 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range to 40 - 80°F; Shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.

C. Sealant: Polysulphide base, two component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 54 of 297


07 92 00 - 3

joints; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 - 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.

D. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, solvent curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 - 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

E. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 - 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

F. Sealant: Polyurethane base, multi-component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 - 80°F; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding.

G. Sealant: Polyurethane base, single component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 - 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 - 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

H. Use either of the following for a concrete sealant.

1. Sealant: Hot poured, synthetic rubber or polymer-based asphalt, in accordance with ASTM D6690 or equal.

2. Sealant: Cold-applied, two-part liquid neoprene, or equal.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint-forming materials.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 55 of 297


07 92 00 - 4

C. Joint Filler: ASTM C1330 or ASTM D994; round, type as recommended by sealant manufacturer; oversized 30 to 50 percent.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, ensure that joint dimensions and physical and environmental conditions are suitable for application of joint sealers.

B. By beginning the Work of this Section, Subcontractor warrants it has examined and verified that existing conditions are in accordance with provisions of Paragraph 3.1.A.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and size joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter that might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Verify that joint-shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

C. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

D. To allow sealants to perform properly, use joint filler to achieve required joint depths.

E. Use bond breaker where required.

F. Before applying coating system or filler to concrete surfaces, perform a plastic sheet test in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install sealant per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.

C. Tool Joints as indicated on Drawings.

D. Joints: Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

E. Coverage: Replace sealants that fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion onto surfaces applied or that do not cure. If the sealant can be detached from a surface

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 56 of 297


07 92 00 - 5

by rubbing the surface contact point with a finger, than the surface adhesion is inadequate.

F. Follow manufacturer’s recommended cure time before painting or overcoating.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 57 of 297


09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL




A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

ASTM D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture Content in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

B. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA)

Architectural Specification Manual

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 13 Surface Preparation of Concrete

1.2 SUBMITTALS



1. List of materials: Before delivery, submit complete list of materials, colors, and location to be used. List shall enumerate percentage of volatile and nonvolatile materials and percentage of component parts of each type of material and the conversion factors to determine dry film thickness from applied wet film thickness. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets for materials proposed for use.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 58 of 297


09 91 00 - 2

2. Dry film thickness test results as required by Paragraph 3.6.A.

C. Approval Not Required: None.


A. Use manufacturers and products listed in PDCA Architectural Specification Manual, Chapter 7.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements. Store materials indoors.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General: Ensure that surfaces are dry and have attained required temperatures and conditions before starting work or continuing previously started work.

B. Weather: No exterior work shall be performed on unprotected surfaces if rain or moisture from other sources is present or expected before applied finishes can dry or attain proper cure.

C. Dust: No finishes shall be applied if dust is being generated at worksite.

D. Temperature

1. Unless recommended otherwise by paint manufacturer, apply coatings when the following temperatures exist.

Ambient Surface Coating Temperature Temperature

Water-thinned paints 50 to 90°F 50 to 90°F

Other paints 45 to 95°F 45 to 95°F

Epoxy As recommended by manufacturer

2. If necessary, provide temporary heat until specified temperatures exist for required time periods. Maintain temporary heat for 24 hours after paint application.

E. Humidity: Follow manufacturer’s directions for extremes.

F. Ventilation: Provide ventilation recommended for extremes.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 59 of 297


09 91 00 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Furnish materials identified in PDCA Architectural Specification Manual, Chapters 5, 6 and 7, for scheduled systems.

B. Furnish ready-mixed materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of work, and which cannot be corrected through specified preparation.

B. Report in writing to Project/System Engineer conditions that may affect proper application of finish. Correct unsuitable conditions before beginning surface preparation or coating application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection

1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to protect surfaces adjacent to areas being painted. Keep spatter, smears, droppings, and over-run of paint materials to a minimum and remove as painting work progresses.

2. Promptly remove spills, splashes and splatter. Use removal methods which do not damage surfaces being cleaned/painted.

3. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by painting work as directed by Project/System Engineer.

4. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings, fastening, and similar items before starting work.

B. Surface Preparation

1. Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish systems in accordance with recommendations of finish material manufacturer, PDCA Architectural Specification Manual, Chapter 3 and 3R, and SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 60 of 297


09 91 00 - 4

2. Obtain written approval from Project/System Engineer before using dry or liquid abrasive blasting.

C. New Surfaces

1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with trisodium phosphate, bleach, or detergent solution, then rinse with potable water and let dry.

2. Ferrous Metals and Carbon Steel

a. For shop-primed surfaces, apply phosphoric acid etch solution at field welded or abraded spots and let set for time recommended by acid etch manufacturer.

b. Prepare in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3. Prime within 4 hours after preparation.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, PDCA Architectural Specification Manual, and this Section.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste materials. Collect materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents and place in containers.

B. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths, brushes, tools, and equipment from site.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Paint and Finish

1. Exterior Ferrous Metals and Carbon Steel: Light and ordinary exposures (not galvanized)

a. PDCA Finish System Code Exterior 11-A, Custom Grade, Semi-gloss or Gloss, Color – Gray

OR

b. PDCA Finish System Code Exterior 11-B, Custom Grade, Semi-Gloss or Gloss, Color – Gray

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 61 of 297


09 91 00 - 5


A. Measure the Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of each coat of material with a notched WFT gage (Nordson®7 790-015) at a minimum of five evenly spaced points for each 100 ft2 of surface area or portion thereof to verify the application will provide the specified minimum dry film thickness. Document results.

B. Inspection and testing will be performed by Quality Control Inspector.

C. Meet requirements of PDCA Architectural Specification Manual for “Custom” Material and work, unless otherwise specified.


7 Nordson is a registered trademark of Nordson Corporation, Westlake, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 62 of 297


09 96 00 - 1

SECTION 09 96 00

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on interior concrete substrates, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

B. Master Painters Institute (MPI)

Architectural Painting Specification Manual

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Before delivery, for each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

2. Submit Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for materials proposed for use.

3. Submit complete list of colors.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 63 of 297


09 96 00 - 2

4. Enumerate percentage of volatile and nonvolatile materials and percentage of component parts of each type of material and the conversion factors to determine dry film thickness from applied wet film thickness.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Field Quality Control inspection and test reports. See Paragraph 1.5.B.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Use manufacturers and products listed in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, approved product list.

B. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to the Buyer.

Document Paragraph

Container Inspection Results 3.5.A

Film Thickness Results 3.5.B


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers.

C. Storage: Maintain materials in clean and dry condition. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

E. Obtain inspection and acceptance by Quality Control Inspection before opening containers or removing labels. See Paragraph 3.5.A.

1.7 PERMITS

Not used.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50°F and 95°F, and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 64 of 297


09 96 00 - 3

B. Ventilation: Provide during and after application to meet applicable safety and health regulations.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Furnish minimum of 1 gallon of unopened top-coating material for future use by Buyer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cloverdale Paint.

2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in “MPI Approved Products List.”

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated.

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. Coating Chemistry: Provide materials that are chloride and PCB free.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 65 of 297


09 96 00 - 4

2.4 BLOCK FILLERS/SEALER

A. Concrete filler/sealer, Epoxy: MPI #116.

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, Epoxy block Filler, 83065.

2. PPG; Aquapon®8, Epoxy Block Filler, 97-685.

3. Sherwin-Williams; KEM CATI-COAT®9 HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B42 Series.

2.5 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77.

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, ClovaCoat 300, 83300.

2. PPG; Aquapon 35, Aquapon 35 Polyamide-Epoxy Gloss, 95 Series.

3. Sherwin-Williams; Tile-Clad®10 HS Epoxy, B62WZ111/B60VX70.

2.6 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE

A. Paint Finish Coat Admixture.

1. Rust-Oleum; Epoxy Shield, Aluminum Oxide Powder.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of Work, and which cannot be corrected through specified preparation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before application, sweep and dust space or area to receive coating.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates indicated.

C. Fill holes, cracks, recessed pockets, in concrete with manufacturer’s recommended materials compatible with concrete substrate to produce even

8 Aquapon is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. 9 KEM CATI-COAT is a registered trademark of SWIMC, Inc., Newark, Delaware. 10 Tile-Clad is a registered trademark of SWIMC, Inc., Newark, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 66 of 297


09 96 00 - 5

surface for application of systems and to prevent entrapment of process-related contaminates; fill material(s) shall be cementitious-based unless otherwise approved.

1. A polymer concrete consisting of a mixture of specified filler and concrete surfacers formulated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations or a similar premixed product may be used to repair gravel pockets, large shrinkage cracks, etc. Coating system application may be initiated after polymer concrete manufacturer’s recommended curing time. Polymer concrete shall be compatible with coating system being applied.

2. Apply specified filler and concrete surfacers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Remove or protect hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

E. Concrete Substrates:

1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

2. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Concrete shall be allowed to cure at least 14 days before coating is applied; maximum moisture content of concrete, when measured with an electronic moisture meter shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Clean concrete surfaces of laitance, oil, stains, dust, and other foreign material.

1. Where laitance has not been removed, treat concrete with uniform application of 1 part 10% solution muriatic acid and 3 parts water or 5% solution of trisodium phosphate.

2. When solution ceases to foam, rinse concrete surface thoroughly with clean water while scrubbing with stiff bristle brush. Remove and dispose of waste solution in accordance Contract Statement of Work. Allow treated area to thoroughly dry.

3. As an alternative to a and b above, remove laitance and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SP 6. Clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 67 of 297


09 96 00 - 6

G. Protection

1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to protect surfaces adjacent to areas being coated. Keep spatter, smears, droppings, and over-run of coating materials to minimum and remove as coating work progresses.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply coating materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.”

1. Use applicators and equipment recommended by manufacturer using techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections.

3.4 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE

A. Mix slip-resistive surface additive into the final topcoat at rate recommended by the additive manufacturer.

1. Install at location indicated on Drawings to receive surface treatment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect special protective coating containers to ensure material complies with Specification requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations. Document container inspection results.

B. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations.

3. Document dry film thickness measurements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 68 of 297


09 96 00 - 7

3.6 CLEANING

A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste materials. Place materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents in containers. Remove flammable waste from jobsite daily.

B. Thoroughly clean brushes, rollers, spatulas, other tools, and spray equipment after each use. Cleaned tools and equipment shall contain no oils, thinners, and other residue.

C. Remove empty cans from site at end of each shift.

D. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths, brushes, tools, and equipment from site. Report all spills immediately.

E. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coating by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

F. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application.

G. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates: Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy Filler/Sealer, MPI #116.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

c. Topcoat: Epoxy gloss, MPI #77.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 69 of 297


13 34 19 - 1

SECTION 13 34 19

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and erect pre-engineered metal buildings, including foundation, electrical, and ventilation as indicated on the drawings and described herein. The intent of this Specification is to provide a single source responsibility for the design, manufacture, erecting, warrant, and testing of the complete building systems. The building will house miscellaneous process heating and compressed air equipment. Work under this Section includes the following:

1. Pre-engineered structural steel framework.

2. Wall framing and girts.

3. Roof framing and purlins.

4. Exterior roof panels.

5. Miscellaneous roof-mounted supports for Buyers Equipment.

6. Exterior metal wall panels.

7. Gutters and downspouts.

8. Partial height interior liner panels.

9. Standard accessories and trim for pre-engineered metal building including eave trim, ridge trim, door trim, corner trim, sealants, weather stripping, etc.

10. HVAC system design.

11. Insulation system for pre-engineered metal building (walls and roof).

12. Exterior doors (3).

13. Overhead doors (2).

14. Foundation design.

15. Duct supporting elements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 70 of 297


13 34 19 - 2

16. Wall-Mounted Louvers.

17. Certified Material Test Reports.

B. Engineering Certification: The building foundation and building design and analysis shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. The stamped work shall include complete calculations for the building, its components, erection drawings and details, and building column reaction loads for foundation design. Calculations shall account for concentrated loads, equipment, and fixtures shown on the drawings and specified herein.

C. Conflicts:

1. Identification of Conflicts: Should conflicts exist between this Specification, attached drawings, and other referenced documents, they shall be brought to the attention of the Buyer, in writing, prior to proceeding with any work. The Buyer shall issue confirming documentation if needed for clarification.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00, “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

2. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Gratings.”

3. Section 06 10 00, “Carpentry.”

4. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”

5. Section 31 23 00, “Excavating, Backfilling, and Compaction.”

E. Building Drawings:

1. H-14-110019, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Grading Plan.”

2. H-14-110024, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural Foundation Plan.”

3. H-14-110024, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Conc. Slab Details.”

4. H-14-110024, Sh. 3, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural Foundation Details.”

5. H-14-110024, Sh. 4, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Sump Details.”

6. H-14-110024, Sh. 5, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Details.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 71 of 297


13 34 19 - 3

7. H-14-110022, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval General Elevations.”



1.2 REFERENCES



A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts – August 1, 2014

AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

AISC Steel Design Guide Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Series 3 Steel Buildings

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

AISI S100 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA)

AMCA 99 Standards Handbook

AMCA Publication 204 Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans

AMCA Standard 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating


AWS QC1 Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 72 of 297


13 34 19 - 4

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Handbook—Fundamentals

ASHRAE Standard 52.2 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

G. ASTM International (ASTM)


ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A529 Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality


ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel


ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 73 of 297


13 34 19 - 5

ASTM A992 Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing

ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution-Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

ASTM C991 Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

ASTM F844 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength

ASTM F1852 Standard Specification for “Twist off” Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies

H. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code - Steel

AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

I. International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS)

Quality Certification Program

J. International Code Council (ICC)


K. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)

Metal Building Systems Manual, 2010 Edition

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 74 of 297


13 34 19 - 6

L. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code

M. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)

HVACMF HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible

N. Steel Door Institute (SDI)

SDI 100 Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames

O. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies

P. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE)

DOE G 414.1-3 Suspect/Counterfeit Items Guide for Use with 10 CFR 830 Subpart A – Quality Assurance Requirements, and DOE O 414.1C – Quality Assurance

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Proposal Submittals

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature and technical data.

2. Product Data: For each type of Metal Building System component. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finished for the following:

a. Structural wall panels.

b. Metal roof panels.

c. Metal wall panels.

d. Metal liner panels.

e. Insulation System.

f. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Description of proposed approach to HVAC design and proposed equipment

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 75 of 297


13 34 19 - 7

g. Overhead roll-up doors.

h. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, provide complete set of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns.

3. Certificates

a. Manufacturer: IAS Quality Certification:

i IAS certificate showing name and address of manufacturer, effective date, and category of certification. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.1.)

b. Erector: IAS Quality Certification:

i IAS certificate showing name and address of erector, effective date, and category of certification, or, in lieu of IAS certification, documentation of past 5 years’ experience record to include project name, location, date of completion, building manufacturer, and contact name and phone number. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.2.)

c. HVAC Contractor:

i Documentation of current Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) certifications for those engineers/technicians in responsible charge of the work under this scope.

C. Approvals Required Prior to Work Submittals

1. Structural Design Analysis Calculation(s) for the metal building including design loads and design criteria. Design calculation shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.

2. Submit anchor bolt placement plan and column reactions and base plate details in advance of erection drawings.

3. Structural foundation analysis and design calculation, signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.

4. HVAC system equipment and duct design calculations and drawings bearing the seal and signature of a Registered Professional Engineer responsible for the system design.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 76 of 297


13 34 19 - 8

5. Shop Drawings:

a. Bear seal and signature of Registered Professional Engineer responsible for system design.

b. Complete erection drawings with identification and assembly of building components indicating: assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections, attachments, openings, cambers, and loads wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage installation, and include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, trim, flashings, closures and special details, distinguishing between factory- and field-assembled work; framing anchor bolt settings, and locations from datum, indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols, distinguishing between shop and field applications; indicate net weld lengths.

c. Show structural design basis information, and materials specification information.

d. Show wall-mounted items including doors and louvers.

e. Accessory Drawings and installation details: Include details of the following items:

i Flashing and Trim.

ii Gutters.

iii Downspouts.

iv Details to be used around piping penetrations.

v Louvers, ducting, HVAC equipment, duct supporting elements.

f. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Include details of reinforcement.

g. Structural foundation drawings and details showing reinforcement footing and stem wall details.

6. Material Certification

a. Submit Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): covering the chemical and physical properties for the following materials:

i Structural Steel.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 77 of 297


13 34 19 - 9

ii High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.

iii Unfinished bolts and nuts.

iv Weld material.

7. Submit detailed HVAC test and balance procedures, including test conditions for systems to be tested, prior to beginning the work.

8. Balancing and test report following completion of system adjustments including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures.

D. Information Only Submittals

1. Instructions and Maintenance Manuals:

a. Manufacturer’s written instructions for shipping, handling, storage, and protection.

b. Manufacturer’s erection or installation instructions for building and components. Indicate preparation requirements and proper sequence of installation.

c. Maintenance Data: for metal panel finishes, to include in maintenance manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Buyer: The party who awards the contract to the Contractor.

B. Installation Contractor: The party responsible for the labor, equipment, testing, and building erection.

C. Manufacturer: The party responsible for the complete and integrated pre-engineered metal building system including: labor, equipment, design, furnishing of components and accessories, fabrication, examination, testing, and warrant of a complete building system.

D. Primary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any built-up, hot-rolled, or cold-form columns or framing systems which transfer their loads directly to the structure’s foundation.

E. Secondary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any cold-form, hot-rolled, or built-up purlins, girts, struts, bracing, or beams which transfer their loads from the cladding to the primary structural framing or members to which they attach.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 78 of 297


13 34 19 - 10


A. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

a. The Company manufacturing the products specified in this Section shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience in the manufacture of Metal Building Systems of similar to that specified.

b. As a manufactured product, the design, detailing, and fabrication of the pre-engineered metal building shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer in the state of Washington, who is a permanent full-time employee of the manufacturer of the pre-engineered metal building.

c. The metal building systems manufacturer shall be accredited under the International Accreditation Service, (IAS) “Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems (AC472).”

d. Member of the MBMA.

2. Installation Contractor Qualifications:

a. Acceptable to and approved by manufacturer.

b. All workmen and their supervisors shall have specialized experience in the erection of Metal Building Systems similar to that specified, for a period of at least 5 years documented, and approved by the manufacturer.

c. Erector shall employ persons trained for installations of metal buildings.

3. Certificate of design and manufacture conformance:

a. Metal building system manufacturer shall submit written certification prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, registered to practice in the state of Washington verifying that building system design and metal roof system design (including panels, clips, and support system components) meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Certification shall reference specific dead loads, live loads, snow loads, wind loads/speeds, tributary area load reductions (if applicable), concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads,

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 79 of 297


13 34 19 - 11

end-use categories, governing code bodies, including year, and load applications.

c. Certificate shall be on metal building system manufacturer’s letterhead.

4. HVAC Contractor

a. Employer of engieers and technicians regularly engaged in testing adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems.

b. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC systems.

c. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.

5. Qualification of Welding Personnel and Procedures

a. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall have been qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 prior to welding. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications (WPSs), procedure qualification records (PQRs), and welder performance qualification test results at jobsite.

b. Visual welding inspection methods shall be used for verification of weld quality as outlined by AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.9, with Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria, in Table 6.1.

c. Qualification of Welding Inspectors: Welding inspectors shall be AWS Certified Welding Inspectors qualified and certified in accordance with AWS QC1.

6. Materials

a. The manufacturer shall ensure that no suspect or counterfeit parts or components are provided in conjunction with this procurement. Suspect/counterfeit items are described in Appendices 4 and 5 of DOE G 414.1-3.

b. CMTRs in accordance with Paragraphs 2.2.A.3, 2.2.A.5, and 2.2.C.4.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 80 of 297


13 34 19 - 12


A. See Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.

B. Protect building components and accessories from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

C. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with product name, manufacturer, type, and grade.

D. Store off the ground (e.g., on wood blocking or pallets) and protect with impervious covering. Protect from rusting and damage or permanent distortion.

E. Protect finish of metal panels during storage, handling, and installation by application of removable plastic film or other suitable material placed between panels. Do not allow panels to come in contact with other material that would result in scratching, denting, staining, or other damage to the panel finish.

1.7 PERMITS

Not used.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The following site features and adjacent structures shall be considered in the design/construction as appropriate:

1. This Building is approximately 40 ft away from Building 242A-BA and approximately 15 ft from the associated diesel storage tank, to the south of the Building, as shown on Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.

2. Electrical transformer equipment will be located to the east of the building. See Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.

1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The metal building shall be clear span, rigid frame steel structure with tapered columns and roof beams, gable roof, without interior columns.

B. Minimum Roof Slope: 1 in. in 12 in. (1:12)

C. Building Dimensions/Bay Spacing/Eave Height: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. The building shall be designed by the manufacturer as a complete system. All components of the system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

1. Primary Framing System: Primary framing shall consist of transverse rigid frames of rafters and columns with solid webs. The rigid frame shall be fabricated of shop-welded steel plate sections, tapered columns, and

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 81 of 297


13 34 19 - 13

roof beams, complete with necessary splice plates, factory drilled for bolted field assembly as specified in this Section.

2. Beam and Post Endwall Frames: Endwall corner posts and endwall roof beams, manufacturer’s standard, as required by design criteria (building will not be expandable).

3. Secondary framing shall consist of purlins, girts, eave struts, flange braces, and sag angles as required by design.

4. Lateral Bracing: manufacturer’s standard to accommodate horizontal loads not resisted by main frame action in the sidewall, endwall, and roof. Cables and/or wire rope bracing shall not be used.

5. Wall System: Preformed steel panels, trim and accessories, with insulation as specified in this Section.

6. Roof Purlins: manufacturer’s standard zee purlins mounted on top of structural frame members.

7. Roof System: Standing-seam roof panels with insulation, as specified in this Section, Paragraph 2.3.

8. Interior liner panels.

9. Soffit panels.

10. Accessories: Building louvers, overhead doors, walk-in doors, hardware, sealers, gutters, and downspouts.

1.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance

1. Provide metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads within the limits and conditions indicated.

2. Size and fabricate wall and roof system free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

B. Building Design Requirements

1. Applicable Building Code: The IBC, as amended by DOE, the State of Washington, and local agencies. The occupancy category is IV (seismic design category D) as defined in IBC and shall be designed as performance category 2 (PC-2) structure for safety significant service.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 82 of 297


13 34 19 - 14

2. Architectural/Code Data:

a. The occupancy of the building as defined in IBC is: F-1, Factory Industrial.

b. Construction Classification: Type IIB, Non-combustible.

c. Required Fire Resistance Ratings: None.

d. Fire Protection: None/Not Required.

e. Fire Extinguishers: Provided by others.

f. Exit Lighting: Provided by others.

3. Fabrication of structural members shall be in accordance with MBMA, and for items not covered therein, AISC 360.

4. Snow Load:

a. Ground Snow Load (Pg): 15 pounds per square foot.

b. Exposure Coefficient (Ce): C.

c. Importance Factor (I): 1.00.

5. Minimum Roof Live Load: 20 pounds per square foot. Live load reduction not permitted.

6. Building System Dead Load: Shall be the weight of the Metal Building System and as determined by the building system manufacturer.

7. Collateral Loads: The Contractor shall state the allowable collateral loads for roof purlins and secondary framing, and primary rigid frames (the weight of any non-moving equipment or material, such as ceilings, electrical or mechanical equipment, sprinkler, conduit, etc.).

a. Metal building design shall include the Buyers Pipe/Conduit Support Beams as shown in Figure 9. See Paragraph 1.10.B.15.

8. Wind Load:

a. IBC/ASCE 7:

i Basic Wind Speed: 115 miles per hour (3-second gust).

ii Exposure Category (Ce): C.

iii Project-Specific Importance Factor (I): 1.0.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 83 of 297


13 34 19 - 15

iv Enclosed building.

b. All Members, including secondary roof and wall members, shall be designed for component and cladding net wind pressures as determined by ASCE 7.

i Secondary roof members shall be designed for a minimum 20 psf net component and cladding uplift pressure.

9. Earthquake Load:

a. IBC:

i Occupancy Classification: Category IV

ii IBC Site Class: C.

iii Seismic Design Category: D.

iv Project Specific Importance factor: 1.5 per ASCE 7.

v Spectral Response Factors:

Horizontal: SD1 = 0.192g and SDS = 0.588g

Vertical: SD1 = 0.098 and SDS = 0.346g

10. Load Combinations:

a. Design metal building system to withstand the most critical effects of load factors and load combinations (dead, live, snow, earthquake, wind, etc.) in accordance with ASCE 7 or IBC.

11. Deflection Criteria:

a. In accordance with the applicable provisions of the AISC Steel Design Guide Series 3 – Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Steel Buildings.

b. Applies to primary and secondary framing members, bracing members, roof panels, and wall cladding.

12. Drift Provisions:

a. Maximum horizontal deflection, or drift, at the roof level of a structure as measured at the eave in relation to the concrete floor slab, shall be the lesser of 1 in. or H/250 based on a 50-year wind storm.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 84 of 297


13 34 19 - 16

13. Thermal Effects: Standing Seam roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a temperature variation. Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from change in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

14. Structural Steel Design Standards:

a. All structural steel sections and welded plate members shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction and AWS D1.1.

b. MBMA, Metal Building Systems Manual.

c. AISC 360.

d. Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members: Design in accordance with AISI S100.

e. Structural System: Design in accordance with specified building Code (Refer to Building Design Requirements, Paragraph 1.10.B).

15. Roof Mounted Supports for Buyers Equipment

a. Provide pipe/conduit support beams as shown on the Drawings (Figure 9) for support of the Buyers piping, conduit and cable runs.

16. Each beam shall be designed to support a distributed load of 175 lb/ft.

a. Metal framing systems attached to purlins in accordance with Building Manufacturer recommendations, where shown on Drawings:

i B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii Tolco®11, Inc.

iii Unistrut®12 Corp.; Unistrut International

b. Repair insulation liner, as required, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

11 Tolco is a registered trademark of Cooper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois. 12 Unistrut is a registered trademark of Unistrut International Corporation, Wayne, Michigan.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 85 of 297


13 34 19 - 17

C. Building Anchorage and Foundation Design:

1. The scope for the building foundation design will be by the Contractor. Foundation design will support the building reactions and other loads that may be imposed by the building use developed and provided by the building manufacturer.

2. Foundation shall comply with IBC and ACI 318.

D. Anchor Bolts:

1. Provide the design for anchor bolts (including size, length and embedment), which shall be designed to resist all column reactions.

2. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. The column reactions will be provided by the building manufacturer.

3. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the Contractor and not by the building manufacturer.

4. Anchor bolts/rods shall meet ASTM F1554.

E. Electrical requirements for HVAC Equipment

1. Provide the work in accordance with NFPA 70. Electrical material and equipment shall be accepted, certified, listed, labeled, or otherwise determined safe by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

2. Each major load [e.g., each electric unit heater, fan, etc.] will be provided with a local disconnect switch provided by Buyer. The Buyer will be responsible for providing conductors and conduit from equipment to disconnect switch. Connection of building supply power to disconnect switch will be Buyer.

3. The AREA is electrically unclassified.

4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4.

5. Building power to equipment will be 480 VAC/ 3 ph / 60 Hz.

F. Heating and Ventilation

1. Contractor shall provide the design for building heating, ventilation and air-conditioning. The system shall be a ducted system. The HVAC design

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 86 of 297


13 34 19 - 18

shall be such that the total heating and cooling load be divided into two 50% systems to afford some degree of conditioning and ventilation should one unit be taken out of service. Design to preclude accidental excessive negative pressure in the building.

2. Design Criteria:

a. The site meteorological pressure shall be measured at an elevation of 733 ft.

b. For equipment sizing and building heating or cooling load calculations, design conditions for Hanford shall be used, which are:

i Annual Heating Design Conditions @ 99%

Temperature 12.6 °F DB

Dew Point 4.6 °F

Humidity Ratio 7.2 grains water/lb. dry air

Mean coincident DB 15.1 °F

c. Annual Cooling Design Conditions @ 2%

i Temperature 93.3°F DB

ii Mean coincident WB 64.1°F

iii Dew Point 53.4°F

d. HVAC equipment located outdoor shall be designed for the extreme bounding temperatures of:

i Summer: 115°F

ii Winter: -25°F

e. Blowing Dust: Concentration of 0.177 g/m3, with wind speeds of 18 m/s at a height of 3 m. Particle size will be less than 150 μm in size.

f. Solar Radiation: Solar radiation environment of 900 Langleys.

g. Equipment Heat Loads: (Basis: See Attachment 1)

i Electrical equipment heat load: 3,300 watt

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 87 of 297


13 34 19 - 19

ii Water heater heat load: 26.4 kW

iii Electric motor heat load: 4,350 watt

iv Personnel Load: 5 people; 1,500 Btu/hr per person (assume: heavy work load)

3. Indoor Design Conditions

a. Heating Load Calculation:

i The winter outdoor dry bulb design temperature listed above shall apply.

ii The indoor design temperature shall be no higher than 70°F for personnel and no less than 60°F to provide adequate equipment protection. The design basis shall be based on personnel comfort.

iii No credit shall be taken for heat gain from equipment or personnel as equipment may or may not be running, and personnel numbers vary.

b. Cooling Load Calculation:

i The indoor design temperature shall be no less than 78°F and no higher than 104°F to provide adequate equipment protection. The design basis shall be for personnel comfort.

4. Air System Design

a. The maximum flow rate shall be determined based on the loads expected to achieve design conditions. Ventilation system ductwork system shall be designed by the constant velocity method and pre-balanced through duct sizing; however, ducting shall incorporate manually adjustable dampers into the design.

b. Air distribution system shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals, “Duct Design” section.

c. All ductwork and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible,” and according to the static pressure expected to be encountered in the system. Flexible duct shall not be used for return or exhaust systems.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 88 of 297


13 34 19 - 20

d. Manufacturer’s standard diffusers, registers, and grills shall be used.

e. Manually adjustable volume dampers shall be provided ahead of flexible ducts serving supply grills, registers, and diffusers.

f. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, for structural carbon steel, or AWS D9.1 for stainless and carbon steel sheet metal

5. Control System

a. HVAC system shall be designed and installed using commercially available equipment and techniques to control the temperature, pressure and air quality. All thermostats shall be manually adjustable over the operating range.

6. Piping and Coils

a. HVAC equipment shall be located outdoors. (See Paragraph 1.10.F.15.) The location of air-conditioning equipment components shall account for piping and equipment pressure drop, and equipment clearance and maintenance requirements. Access shall be provided for the removal of any coil or other equipment component, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

7. Ventilation and Exhaust

a. Building shall be provided with fresh ventilation air. Minimum ventilation shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010 using the Ventilation Rate Procedure.

8. Materials

a. Metallic parts shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably finished to resist corrosion.

b. Materials shall be free from defects or imperfections that my affect performance. The use of rebuilt or refurbished components is prohibited for initial construction.

9. Noise Level

a. The mechanical equipment noise emissions at the maximum flow rate condition shall be less than 85 dBA, 8-hour time weighted average or equivalent noise dose when measured by a calibrated noise meter at 1 meter from the source.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 89 of 297


13 34 19 - 21

10. Maintainability

a. Equipment, instrumentation, and items requiring maintenance shall be accessible for ease of inspection and removal/replacement.

11. Filters

a. Filters for dust removal shall be provided and shall be designed for ease of replacement. Filters shall have a minimum efficiency of 80% in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

12. Fans

a. Fans shall be industrial grade and shall be sized to provide the required HVAC system, required by this Specification. Fan shall meet, as a minimum, ANSI/AMCA Publication 204 (Balance and Quality), ANSI/AMCA Standard 210, (Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating), and ANSI/AMCA 99 (Standards Handbook).

b. Fan assembly shall be constructed of material that is compatible with the interconnected ducting. Machine guards shall be provided to protect personnel from rotating shafts.

13. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Ductwork

a. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be designed to accommodate the IBC earthquake loads specified in Paragraph 1.10.B.9.

b. Metal framing systems:

i B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii Tolco, Inc.

iii Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

c. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

d. Install lateral bracing and supports to prevent swaying.

14. Louvers

a. Louvers shall be automatic intake dual combination louver damper. Stationary blades with extruded vinyl seals and automatic backdraft blades contained within an aluminum frame. Louver shall include a bird screen and filter rack.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 90 of 297


13 34 19 - 22

b. Louvers shall be sized and designed to accommodate the design conditions.

c. Louver design and structure shall withstand a minimum wind load of 20 lbs per sq. ft. (equivalent to a 90 mph wind).

d. Paint and prime to match wall panels.

15. Constraints to HVAC Design:

a. The Buyer has performed an electrical lighting analysis and has located light fixtures as shown in the attached drawings. The Contractor shall design and locate the duct system and associated duct support hangers to avoid interference with the lighting.

b. An area for the equipment pad for HVAC equipment has been designated/located as shown on the Drawings. Seller shall identify equipment footprint necessary for anchoring the equipment. Equipment weights (operating) shall be provided to the Buyer for substantiating the pad design by the Seller.

G. Performance Requirements

1. Thermal Performance

a. Provide insulated metal panel assemblies for roof and wall with the following minimum R-Values, and as required to accommodate building heating and ventilation requirements:

i R-Value Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: 30.

ii R-Value Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: 19.

iii R-Value Metal Man-Doors: 5.

iv R-Value Metal Roll-up Doors: 5.

H. Warranty

1. The manufacturer for the pre-engineered metal building shall be warrant in writing against defects in materials and workmanship, and that after erection is completed, system shall be weather tight. The warranty period shall be 5 years from date of completion erection.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 91 of 297


13 34 19 - 23

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Products manufactured or supplied by the following, and meeting these Specifications may be used on this Project:

1. American Buildings Company, Columbus, GA.

2. Butler Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO.

3. Garco Building Systems, West Houston, TX.

4. HCI Steel Buildings, Arlington, WA.

5. Kirby Building Systems, Inc., Columbus, GA.

6. Nucor Building Systems, Waterloo, IN.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing

1. Primary Framing: manufacturer’s standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements and that provides the configuration shown on the Drawings. Column and rafter type shall be tapered. Interior columns are not permitted.

2. All framing members shall carry an easily visible identifying mark to aid the installation Contractor in the erection of the building.

3. The manufacturer shall submit CMTRs that verify that the material strength requirements have been met, and chemical requirements are in accordance with the applicable ASTM.

4. Plates, Stiffeners, etc.: All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners shall be factory welded into place on the structural members and factory drilled/punched for bolted field assembly.

5. All welded shop connections shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Provide CMTRs for weld materials for primary framing weldments.

6. Hot-rolled shapes and flat bar shall conform to ASTM A1011, ASTM A992, ASTM A572, or ASTM A529, Grade 55, having a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.

7. Round Tube shapes: ASTM A500, Grade B, with minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 92 of 297


13 34 19 - 24

8. Cold formed shapes: ASTM A1011, Grade 55 or ASTM A653, Grade 55.

9. X-Bracing: ASTM A529, A572, or A36. Do not use wire rope or cable for permanent bracing. Angles: fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing.

10. All field connections shall be bolted. Bolts shall be ASTM F1852 “twist-off” type tension control bolt, nut, and washer assemblies. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.

11. Shop Primer of Structural Steel Framing System:

a. Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow, as appropriate, one or more specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council.

b. Apply one coat of rust inhibitive alkyd zinc chromate, red oxide, or waterborne primer, 1.0 mil dry thickness.

B. Secondary Framing

1. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer’s standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, to comply with the following:

a. Roof Purlins, Sidewall, and Endwall Girts: Z-shaped sections of adequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria.

b. Steel for cold-formed galvanized channel and Z-sections shall be ASTM A1011, Grade 55 (55,000 psi minimum yield stress), with G60 galvanized coating.

c. Base or Sill Angles: zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

d. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

e. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer’s standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 93 of 297


13 34 19 - 25

C. Bolted Connections

1. Primary Framing: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 high-strength bolted connections.

2. Secondary Framing: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325.

3. ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

4. Provide CMTRs for high-strength bolts, including nuts and washers, and CMTRs for unfinished bolts and nuts.

2.3 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. Provide roofing, siding, interior metal liner, and soffit sheets formed to the general profile or configuration customarily utilized by the metal building system manufacturer to meet the Specification requirements.

1. Metal Roof System: Standing seam roof panels; manufacturer’s factory-formed standing seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlins using a concealed clip. Roof system shall meet UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. Form panels from 24 gauge, 50,000 psi minimum yield Galvalume®13 sheet steel, ASTM A792, grade 50, with a color coating. Perimeter trim, start/finish panels, ridge cover, and transition flashing shall be provided and shall be designed to accommodate the roof’s expansion/contraction. Closures, sealants, and fasteners shall be provided as required for a weather-tight installation.

2. Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to girts using exposed fasteners. Form panels of a minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheets. Panel Profile: PBR, 1 1/4-in. deep ribs which are trapezoidal in shape and are spaced on 12-in. centers; one piece, extending from sill to eave, with base trim at sill and eave trim. Closures, sealants, and fasteners shall be provided as required for a weather-tight installation.

3. Interior Liner Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to girts using exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheets, ASTM A653. Finish shall be: shop-applied baked enamel finish, to liner panels, and related trim and accessory elements. Apply finish coat on the exposed face and manufacturer’s standard wash coat on the reverse face; color shall be manufacturer’s standard white. Liner

13 Galvalume is a registered trademark of BIEC International, Inc., Vancouver, Washington.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 94 of 297


13 34 19 - 26

height shall be 8 ft from finished floor. Provide matching cap trim and trim around walk doors.

4. Soffit Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed, soffit panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels using exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimum 26-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653.

5. Panel Coatings: Exterior side of roof, soffit, and siding panels shall be finished with an extended life, fluoropolymer coating utilizing Kynar®14 500/Hylar®15 5000 resin. Reverse side of panels shall receive manufacturer’s standard wash coat. Surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed, then coated and oven-baked to cure. Top coating shall have a dry film thickness of 0.75-0.90 mils on the exterior surface, over 0.2 mils nominal dry film thickness of epoxy type primer over galvanized or Galvalume sheet. The interior surface shall be protected by manufacturer’s standard wash coat system of 0.6 ± 0.05 mils thickness.

B. Flashing, Trim & Closures

1. Flashing and/or trim shall be furnished at eaves, rake, corners, base, framed openings, and wherever necessary to seal against the weather and provide a finished appearance. Coatings shall match associated roofing, liner and siding panels.

C. Sealant, Sealing Tape, Weather-strips:

1. Concealed Joint Sealants: Non-shrinking, non-drying butyl-based sealant specifically formulated for factory application in standing seams.

2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicon rubber sealant as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer’s standard pressure-sensitive, non-corrosive, non-curing butyl tape.

4. Weather strips: Door manufacturer’s standard approved products; closed cell neoprene or extruded vinyl.

2.4 INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIERS

A. Fiberglass banded blanket or batt insulation system:

1. Insulation: ASTM C991, Type 1 fiberglass blanket insulation.

14 Kynar is a registered trademark of Arkema, Inc., Prussia, Pennsylvania. 15 Hylar is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc., Thorofare, New Jersey.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 95 of 297


13 34 19 - 27

2. Manufacturer’s standard continuous polyethylene film vapor retarder liner, white in color.

3. The composite product shall have a fire hazard classification of 25 (maximum) flame spread index and 50 (maximum) smoke developed index, when used in accordance with ASTM E84.

4. Accessories: Include all insulation hangers, sealants, and fasteners as required by the manufacturer for a complete system.

5. Manufacturer: Simple Saver System®16, Thermal Design, Madison, NE; or equal.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Personnel Doors, Frames, and Hardware:

1. Provide where shown on the attached Drawings.

2. Insulated metal doors and frames shall comply with IBC, SDI-100, Level 3, extra heavy duty, Model 2 (seamless), minimum 16-gauge faces.

3. Standard 3-ft wide by 7-ft high by 1 3/4-in. thick.

4. Glazing: Narrow lite glass (N) panel with trim and flexible polycarbonate panel.

5. Manufacturer’s standard zinc-coated galvanized steel, and finish painted, with closure at top of doors.

6. Furnish manufacturer’s standard hardware: Lockset, strike plate, weather-stripping and threshold, kick plate.

7. Doors and frames shall be designed by their manufacturer to withstand the wind loads specified in paragraph “Wind Loads” in Part 26 (i.e., for ASCE 7, Wind Loads - Components and Cladding).

B. Overhead Coiling (Rollup) Doors:

1. Doors shall be overhead, coiling type, with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides, hood, and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as indicated and designed to withstand wind loading indicated. Slats shall be continuous length for width of door indicated, without splices. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for rotating members.

16 Simple Saver System is a registered trademark of Harkins, Daniel J., Port Charlotte, Florida.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 96 of 297


13 34 19 - 28

2. Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide.

3. Door Curtain and Hood Material: Galvanized steel.

4. Insulation: Fill slats with manufacturer’s standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84. Enclose insulation completely within slate faces.

5. Locking Devices: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock (provided by Buyer), located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

6. Door-Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated corrosion-resistant finish: Gray color as selected from manufacturer’s full range for both interior curtain slat and exterior curtain slat faces.

7. Accessories:

a. Weather seals: Equip each door with weather-striping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weather-tight installation.

b. Push/Pull Handles: Equip the door with emergency-operated lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

C. Trim: Factory-formed and factory-painted ridge cap, rake trim, simple eave trim, panel side trim, corner trim, door trim, and other trim as necessary.

D. Gutter Fascia and Downspouts:

1. Material: ASTM A653, galvanized steel.

2. Gutter Fascia:

a. Prefinished to match wall panels.

b. Furnish hangers with factory-applied paint.

3. Preformed Corner Closures: Furnish to match configuration of gable fascia.

4. Downspouts:

a. Configuration: Nominal 4-in. corrugated rectangular box with minimum 11 sq. in. of cross-section area.

b. Factory finish to match wall panels.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 97 of 297


13 34 19 - 29

E. Miscellaneous: Manufacturer’s standard fasteners, self-tapping screws, metal-backed neoprene washers, weather stripping, sealants, closure strips, gaskets, and other items as required for a complete installation.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory Fabricate: To manufacturer’s written standards, MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual, and, for items not covered, AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

B. Building Parts:

1. Accurate and true to dimension to facilitate building erection and proper fit without cutting, fitting or other field alterations.

2. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

3. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, ruptures, and sharp edges.

C. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA for fabrication and erection tolerances.

D. Welded Connections: In accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Sheet Steel: Welding in accordance with AWS D1.3.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Building will be erected around operating facilities.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify concrete foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position and properly squared.

B. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer’s written erection instructions and erection drawings.

B. Use templates for accurate setting of anchor rods, as required.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 98 of 297


13 34 19 - 30

C. Provide temporary bracing in accordance with MBMA standards and as required for safe installation.

D. Ream holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts. Burned holes for bolted connections are not permitted without written approval by the Metal Building System manufacturer’s professional engineer.

E. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer’s professional engineer.

F. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated. Erect building frame true and level with vertical members plumb and bracing properly installed. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.

H. Provide temporary guys and bracing where needed for squaring and plumbing, and securing the structural framing against loads such as wind loads acting on the exposed framing.

I. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC for bolt type and joint type specified.

J. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing as required to satisfy design loads and as shown on Drawings.

1. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.

2. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, louvers, fans, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

K. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 99 of 297


13 34 19 - 31

L. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within those permitted by MBMA.

3.4 ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. Install all wall and roofing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and details.

B. Field Cutting of panels by torch is not permitted.

C. Attach panels to structural supports to maintain a weather tight seal while allowing for thermal and structural movement.

1. Install exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment.

2. Field seam side laps of standing seam roof panels using electrically-operated seaming machine.

3. Use proper tools to install screw fasteners to compress neoprene washer without damaging washer or stripping metal.

D. Install manufacturer’s standard joint sealants, gaskets, and closure strips as required for weather-tight installation.

E. Field Cutting and Patching: Perform in a manner not to impair appearance, weathertightness, or structural capacity of panel system.

3.5 DOORS AND FRAME INSTALLATION

A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturers’ written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seams covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 100 of 297


13 34 19 - 32

2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Where dissimilar metal surfaces contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Gutters/Downspouts:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eaves with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 in. o.c., using manufacturer’s standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

2. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 1/2-in. telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 in. away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 in. o.c. in between. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. Install splash pads under each downspout.

C. Louvers: Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

D. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetrations. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 TESTING

A. After installation, perform electrical continuity check and functionally check fans and heaters. Document testing and submit test report.

B. HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Collect the following data and include in final report:

1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 101 of 297


13 34 19 - 33

d. Project name.

e. Project location.

f. Name of Buyer’s Technical Representative (BTR).

g. Project Subcontractor.

h. Project altitude.

i. Report date.

2. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of system.

c. Description of systems operation sequence.

d. Nomenclature used throughout report.

e. Test conditions.

3. Instrument List:

a. Instrument.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model number.

d. Serial number.

e. Range.

f. Calibration date.

4. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Model/Frame.

c. HP/BHP.

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.

e. RPM

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 102 of 297


13 34 19 - 34

f. Service factor.

g. Starter size, rating, heater elements.

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

5. V-Belt Drive:

a. Identification/location.

b. Required driven RPM.

c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.

d. Belt, size and quantity.

e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.

f. Center to center distance.

6. Cooling Coil Data:

a. Identification/number.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.

g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.

h. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

j. Water flow, design and actual.

k. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

l. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 103 of 297


13 34 19 - 35

o. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

7. Heating Coil Data:

a. Identification/number.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.

f. Water flow, design and actual.

g. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

h. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

j. Entering air temperature, design and actual.

k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.

l. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

8. Electric Duct Heater:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Identification/number.

c. Location.

d. Model number.

e. Design kW.

f. Number of stages and readings.

g. Phase, voltage, amperage.

h. Test voltage (each phase)

i. Test amperage (each phase).

j. Air flow, specified and actual.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 104 of 297


13 34 19 - 36

k. Temperature rise, specified and actual

9. Air Moving Equipment (e.g., Air Handling Unit, etc.):

a. Location.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model number.

d. Serial number.

e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.

f. Air flow, specified and actual.

g. Return air flow, specified and actual.

h. Outside air flow, specified and actual.

i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.

j. Inlet pressure.

k. Discharge pressure.

l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

m. Number of Belts/Make/Size.

n. Fan RPM.

10. Duct

a. System zone/branch.

b. Duct size.

c. Area.

d. Design velocity.

e. Design air flow.

f. Test velocity.

g. Test air flow.

h. Duct static pressure.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 105 of 297


13 34 19 - 37

i. Air temperature.

j. Air correction factor.

11. Vibration Test:

a. Location of points:

i Fan bearing, drive end.

ii Fan bearing, opposite end.

iii Motor bearing, center (when applicable).

iv Motor bearing, drive end.

v Motor bearing, opposite end.

vi Casing (bottom or top).

vii Casing (side).

12. Final Design Document Package.

a. Final (as-built) drawings.

b. Final (as-built) calculations.

c. Final Test Report.

13. Normally accepted readings, velocity and accelerations.

14. Unusual conditions at time of test.

3.8 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PAINTING

A. Following erection, remove all unused material, screws, fasteners, and other debris from completed installation. Use caution when removing metal cuttings from surface of prefinished metal panels.

B. Replace damaged, dented, buckled, or discolored metal panels.

C. Repair damaged, painted, and galvanized surfaces.

3.9 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 106 of 297


13 34 19 - Att. 1–1

SECTION 13 34 19 – ATTACHMENT 1

HVAC DESIGN LOADS

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 107 of 297


13 34 19 - Att. 1–2

HVAC Design Loads Miscellaneous Electrical Loads:

1) 40 hp drive on hot water skids (1 per skid) – 764 Watts 2) 7.5 HP drive on water skid – 267 Watts 3) Heater control cabinet SCR’s (1 per skid, 1.5 Watts/Amp) – 2500 Watts 4) Led lighting fixtures 10.7 Watts/fixture 24 fixtures – 256 watts 5) Miscellaneous power supplies, HMI Panel, equipment contactors, switchgear equipment

– 500 Watts

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 108 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 1

SECTION 13 47 13.13

CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND AND SUBMERGED PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements for materials, installation, and repair to underground cathodic protection systems.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS/CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.

The following documents and other referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

C920-14A Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

B8-11 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

D1248 – 12 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable, Type 1, Class A, Category 5, Grades E4 & E5

B. NACE International (NACE)

SP0285-2011 Corrosion Control of Underground Storage Tank Systems by Cathodic Protection

SP0169-2013 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

SP0286-2007 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines


NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

486C Splicing Wire Connectors

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 109 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 2

510 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not Used


A. The installation shall conform to the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and Standard Practices (SP) of NACE, SP0285, SP0286, and SP0169- latest editions.

B. Update the provided record drawings for the cathodic protection system continuously throughout installation of the cathodic protection system. Write Engineering Change Notices or redline the existing Engineering Change Notices as necessary to reflect the appropriate configuration. The record drawings shall properly identify exact locations with dimensional ties to existing structures or survey monuments for all test stations and buried cables and wires.

C. Electrical/Electronic Product Acceptability: Provide labeling and documentation in accordance with the Statement of Work and Section 26 05 53.

D. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

E. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records required by this Section shall be delivered to WRPS in accordance with Contract Statement of Work.

1.5 PERMITS

A. Obtain from WRPS and conspicuously post the following permits before starting work under this Section.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 110 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 3

2.2 MATERIALS

A. 3M Scotchkote Electrical coating or equivalent.

B. Junction Boxes: Gerome 2007 Box, or equivalent as required, as depicted on H-2-91086.

C. Plastic Warning Tape:

1. Plastic warning tape for horizontal runs of buried leads in cable trenches shall be a minimum of 4 mils thick and 6-inches wide inert, yellow, plastic film designed for prolonged use underground. The tape shall have the words, "CAUTION CATHODIC PROTECTION CABLE BELOW,” or similar, clearly visible in repeating patterns along its entire length.

D. Plastic warning tape for anodes shall be buried according to H-14-011500.

E. Conductors

1. Direct burial High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMW-PE) Cathodic Protection Cables: 600 Volts, Single Conductor, Stranded Copper cable for direct burial. Conductor shall conform to ASTM B8-11, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. Insulation shall conform to ASTM D1248 – 12, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable, Type 1, Class A, Category 5, Grades E4 & E5. Size specified on the Drawings

2. Bonding: Type “CP” wire, No. 4 AWG, or as shown on drawings.

3. Anode header and loop: Type “CP” wire, No. 2 AWG, or as shown on drawings.

F. Anode

1. Canistered Wire Anode: De Nora LIDA17® Pack canistered wire anode, Model LP 3 X 40H with at least 1.3 amp output or equivalent

G. Exothermic Fusion Weld Molds, Weld Metal, and Conductor Sleeves.

1. For new pipe: Use either of the following “Cadweld” weld molds by Erico Products or approved substitute. Weld metal shall be either low emission type recommended by weld mold manufacturer with igniters and filters or standard type. Base mold on pipe size and conductor size. Maximum weld metal size shall be CA15. Adapter copper sleeves shall be used for # 10 AWG and smaller conductors.

17 LIDA is registered Tradename of Industrie De Nora S.p.A.Vi, Milan Italy

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 111 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 4

a. Low emission (EXOLON) type CAHA mold with electric starter part No. XLB971A1. Mold type suffix based on conductor size.

b. Standard type CAHA mold. Suffix based on conductor size.

c. For vertical steel plate (anchor plate): Standard type mold for cable to vertical steel surface (type VS, VN, VF, etc.). Suffix based on conductor size.

d. Material of different manufacturers shall not be mixed.

e. Connections shall be made in accordance with UL 486C.

f. Ensure manufacturer’s installation and inspection procedures are provided with product. Procedures for “Cadweld” items are contained in Erico Products “Installers and Inspectors Guide” (A-7D-01, 1985).

2. Weld Coating

a. Coating for all welds shall be a cold-applied, fast drying mastic consisting of bituminous resin and solvents. The minimum percentage of solids shall be 80 percent. Substitute coating materials shall be compatible with cable insulation, pipe coating and environment.

H. Repair Coating: Carboline®18 Plasite®18 4550 or approved substitute.

1. Abrasive blast area per manufacturer’s recommendations before coating application.

2. Brush or roll application is acceptable for repairs.

I. Splice Kit, Conductor:

a. Cadweld CASS Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.

b. Cadweld CATA Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.

c. Epoxy potting compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices or terminated wires buried underground (for use as required), 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, 85-10, or approved substitute.

18 Carboline and Plasite are registered trademarks of Carboline International Corporation, St. Louis, Missouri.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 112 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 5

J. Tape, Electrical Insulating

1. Scotch rubber splicing tape #23

2. Scotch electrical tape #33

a. Plastic: UL 510, 3/4-inch wide.

b. Self-vulcanizing: UL 510, 3/4-inch wide.

K. 3M Scotchkote™ Electrical Coating FD

L. Touch-up compound for PVC Conduit Coating: Material of Contractor’s choice.

M. Wire marker: Tubular plastic, imprinted or typed with indelible ink, or plastic tag typed with indelible ink, fastened securely to wire with plastic wire tie.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Scale dimensions on the drawings show desired and approximate location of equipment, actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by field conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials and supplies, and shall perform all labor required to provide complete corrosion control systems in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings.

3. Use appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which manufacturer recommends special installation tools.

4. Refer to Section 31 23 00 for excavation or backfill of soil.

B. Test Station: Install below grade test stations at location identified on H-14-011502, Sheet 4, H-14-011506 Sheet 1, and H-14-011506, Sheet 5. Assemble as shown on H-14-011500, Details 1, 2, and 3. Identify exactly location of installation on appropriate drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 113 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 6

C. Junction boxes

1. Install 2 junction boxes according to H-2-94086, detail 1.

2. Label boxes according to H-14-031502, Sheet 1.

3. Conductor labels should indicate where the cables originate from (e.g., A241-CATH-RECT-015, J 42-5, etc.)

D. Conductors

1. Test Stations

a. Wire brush to remove surface contaminents and mechanically grind or file pipe at connection location to white metal surface, free of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to accommodate the weld corrosion protection product to be applied after the weld is complete. Make exothermic weld of conductors to pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Where two or more wires are welded to the metallic structure, the minimum spacing between exothermic welds shall be 6 inches.

c. Inspect exothermic welds for mechanical integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. If weld fails, make another weld at least 3 inches from previous weld attempt, and inspect.

d. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation and conductors will not be damaged during backfill operations or ground or structure movement. As required, cables should be secured with duct tape or tie wraps during pipe trench activity and backfill operations to prevent stress on the weld area.

e. Apply approved coatings on all exposed copper wire, weld material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of 1 inch. Smooth weld coating manually with brush.

f. Use conductors as specified on H-14-011500, Table 1.

g. Repair damaged pipe test conductor wires by cleaning and removing any fraying insulation. Roughen up outer insulation for approximately 4” each side of the defect with utility knife to prepare for application of tapes. Using two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch rubber splicing # 23 tape and two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch electrical #33 plus tape, start from the center of the defect to ensure a double wrap of each layer. Apply 3M

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 114 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 7

Scotchkote™ Electrical Coating FD over taped repair prior to backfill.

h. Make connections to existing conductor wires using a Cadweld CASS type connector, Burndy Type mechanical connector, or appropriately sized copper split bolt per manufacturer’s instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.

i. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the point of installation on the pipeline (or the severed cable connection), to the new test station.

j. Wires to be direct buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.

k. Identify end of each conductor using specified wire marker with typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.

l. Newly installed test station(s): Identify the end of each pipe test conductor using specified wiremarker with typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.

m. Terminate conductors on specified terminals and locations in test station as directed in H-14-011500, Detail 2, and the test station matrices specified on H-14-031502, Sheet 3, and H-14-031506, Sheet 4, as appropriate.

n. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 00.

2. Jumpers

a. Wire brush to remove surface containments and mechanically grind or file pipe at connection location to white metal surface, free of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to accommodate the weld corrosion protection product to be applied after the weld is complete. Make exothermic weld of conductors to pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Where two or more wires are welded to the metallic structure, the minimum spacing between exothermic welds shall be 6 inches.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 115 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 8

c. Inspect exothermic welds for mechanical integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. If weld fails, make another weld at least 3 inches from previous weld attempt, and inspect.

d. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation and conductors will not be damaged during backfill operations or ground or structure movement. As required, cables should be secured with duct tape or tie wraps during pipe trench activity and backfill operations to prevent stress on the weld area.

e. Apply approved coating on all exposed copper wire, weld material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of 1 inch. Smooth weld coating manually with brush.

f. Repair damaged bonding conductor wires by cleaning and removing any fraying insulation. Roughen up outer insulation for approximately 4” each side of the defect with utility knife to prepare for application of tapes. Using two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch rubber splicing # 23 tape and two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch electrical #33 plus tape, start from the center of the defect to ensure a double wrap of each layer. Apply 3M Scotchkote™ Electrical Coating FD over taped repair prior to backfill.

g. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the points of installation on the pipelines. Splices, if required, shall be made using a Cadweld CASS type connector, Burndy Type mechanical connector, or appropriately sized copper split bolt per manufacturer’s instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.

h. Wires buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.

i. Bond per H-2-94086, Details 3 and 5.

3. Anode header, loop, and lead cables

a. If damaged, repair or replace per drawing H-14-011500.

b. Terminate new header and loop cables at rectifier 241A-CATH-RECT-015 positive output terminals and at anode junction boxes.

c. Terminate new negative return cables at rectifier 241A-CATH-RECT-015 negative output terminal (per H-14-031502, Sheet 1).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 116 of 297


13 47 13.13 - 9

Use solderless terminal lugs for conductor terminations. Identify cables using specified wiremarkers.

E. Existing Anodes

1. Replace existing anodes if damaged or depleted.

2. Repair damaged head, leader, or loop cables according to H-14-011500.

3. If the anode is required to be removed and does not need to be replaced, ensure that terminated anode leader cable is fully encapsulated in the 85-14-CP splice kit.

F. New Anodes: Install per manufactures instructions and drawing H-14-011500. Run anode lead cable in field as required. Specify anode and lead wire installation locations.

a. Vertical

b. Horizontal

3.3 FINAL TESTING

A. Construction Acceptance Testing will be performed via RPP-RPT-TBD.

B. Start-up testing will be performed per the commissioning report, RPP-RPT-TBD.


A. Continuity Testing

1. Via RPP-RPT-TBD.

B. Exothermic Welds

1. Document exothermic welds of conductors to new and existing pipe. Include the following:

a. Bonding jumper: Identification of each pipe to which connected and general location of jumper and splice connection as applicable.

b. Verification that welds complies with manufacturer’s installation and inspection requirements.

END OF SECTION

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 117 of 297


22 15 00 - 1

SECTION 22 15 00

COMPRESSED AIR PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of compressed air service piping inside the Air and Water Service Building and outside from the Building to the Tank Farm distribution manifolds.




A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME)

ANSI/ASME B13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualification

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch

ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron and Threaded Fittings

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.34 Valves -Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping

C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 118 of 297


22 15 00 - 2

D. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service


ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts


AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code - Stainless


F. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)

MSS-SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends

G. Hanford Documents


TFC-ENG-STD-12 Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Approval Required.

1. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs): Five days before first use submit two copies of WPSs and/or SWPSs in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 119 of 297


22 15 00 - 3

2. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication submit two copies of welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.

3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit two copies of documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A for information/record.

4. Mechanical Cleaning Verification: Submit two copies of documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.3.B for information/record.

5. Weld Examinations: Submit two copies of documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.5.A.

6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing submit two copies of testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.

7. Vendor Information for Kobelco Compressor: Before shipment submit two copies of the following documentation.

a. Description of Operation.

b. Operation Manual.

c. Parts Manual.

d. Fully Dimensioned Assembly Drawing with equipment weight.

e. Piping Diagram and Instruments Drawing.



B. Qualifications

1. Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Welding Personnel and Procedures for Pressure-Retaining Components (along with attachment thereto and pipe supports) shall be qualified in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 927.6 before welding. Maintain copies of welding procedure, specification, and procedure qualification records at jobsite.

C. Pressure Testing Procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 120 of 297


22 15 00 - 4

D. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

E. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

F. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at the jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS



a. Excavation and Backfill Permit: See the Contract Statement of Work.



PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and in the individual components list below.

B. Overhead Pipe Supports: B-Line B3100C (plastic coated standard clevis hangers) or equivalent. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. See location specified in the Drawings. Add ceiling cross beams as necessary.

C. Close nipples are not permitted unless shown on the Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 121 of 297


22 15 00 - 5

D. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints: Use anaerobic acrylic sealer. Henkel Corporation: Loctite®19 5452 or 272. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specification.

E. Valves: Specified in individual components list section below, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

F. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.” Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

G. Paint: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting” and as specified on the Drawings.

H. Insulation: Only for below grade bends to compensate for thermal expansion. See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Compressor: Kobelco KNW A00-D/H positive displacement, two-stage rotary screw air compressor capable of delivering 100% oil-free air at 162 ACFM at 125 PSIG. The regulating system shall be a full load/no load type. A single point of connection shall be provided for 480 VAC, 3 phase interface. The single point of connection shall have a disconnecting means that is lockable and will isolate all power to the compressor when opened.

B. Air Receiver Tank: Compressed air tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section VIII, Division I for compressed air storage use. Tank shall have a capacity of 240 gallons, a maximum working pressure of 200 psi at 400°F, and dimensions of 30” outer diameter by 84” length. Exterior surface painted with one coat standard shop primer. Manufacturer and part number: Manchester Tank - 302428.

C. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) for Receiver Tank: The PRV for the compressed air line and the 1” PRV discharge piping and components are safety significant. PRV shall be a Consolidated Model 1/2-19110LcF-2-CC-MS-34-MT-FT-GS, with an orifice area of 0.110 in², with a 1/2” MNPT inlet and a 1” FNPT outlet, with 316 Stainless Steel trim, and a rated flow of 319 scfm at 150 psig and 60°F. PRV shall be ASME code stamped and set at 150 psig per RPP-CALC-60082, “Air Compressor Pressure Relief Valve Sizing Calculation.” A code stamp and code data report shall be provided. All safety significant components shall be purchased from an evaluated supplier or commercial grade dedicated prior to installation. Fabricator shall submit CMTR’s for all safety significant materials including weld filler metal except those supplied as GFE.

D. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range with a 4 1/2” dial size and with a 1/2” MNPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall

19 Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 122 of 297


22 15 00 - 6

be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft 45-1109-SD-04L-0/300#.

E. Temperature Indicator: Thermometer shall be a bi-metal, Stainless Steel, 3” Dial 50° to 400°F, 1/2” MNPT inlet, 2.5” lower stem. Manufacturer and part number: Ashcroft 30-CI-60-L-025 50/400°F

F. Regulator: Air pressure regulator shall be a 2” NPT high flow regulator rated to a maximum pressure rating of 300 psig, able to regulate down to at least 10 psig, and an air flow rate of 1000 SCFM. Manufacturer and part number: Jordan Valve Model MK 60, part number 60200S6/PTS6BB34S6SM. Regulator shall be designed in accordance with ASME B16.34.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be clean, free of moisture, oil, dirt, scale, rust, and other foreign material.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Valve Orientation:

1. Install valves as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.

2. Where orientation is not well illustrated, locate and orient valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance.

3. Valves shall be installed such that they are not used as means of support for runs of piping or other components.

B. Identification:

1. Install Stainless Steel tag for each component in this Specification, bearing the tag number shown in the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. The tag number shall be 1/4-in. die-stamped lettering.

2. Piping Identification: Identify piping systems as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ASME B13.1 and also Attachment 1 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping.”

C. Piping:

1. Fabricate and install pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

2. Cut pipe using methods that result in clean, straight cuts.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 123 of 297


22 15 00 - 7

3. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs from threads before assembly.

4. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.

5. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. Leave ends of spare lines capped or blind flanged when installation has been completed.

6. Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into alignment for joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components is prohibited.

7. Pipe supports: Locate and install as shown on the Drawings. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and with applicable recommended procedures of MSS-SP-58.

8. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

9. Outdoor air service piping lines do not require insulation. Place piping on undisturbed soil, or on bedding in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Backfill.”

10. Below grade air service piping lines do not require insulation, but at each bend, install cushions for thermal expansion as specified on the Drawings and according to Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation,” Paragraph 2.2.B.3.

D. Welding:

1. Weld piping attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Use of backing rings is not permitted.

3. Complete piping welds before tie-in welds to fixed items.

4. Weld steel structural elements in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.6.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 124 of 297


22 15 00 - 8


A. Flushing/Testing Preparation

1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform mechanical cleaning.

2. Obtain direction for disposal of flushing water from Project/System Engineer. See the Contract Statement of Work.

B. Cleaning and Flushing

1. After examination is complete and before pressure testing system, or before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping internal surfaces by mechanical cleaning.

2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the Project/System Engineer until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

a. Remove all water upon completion of high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water.

b. Use drain taps at low point of piping system to ensure complete drainage and drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain cleanliness.

3. Provide documented evidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished as specified in this Section.


A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE) of Welds

1. Perform examination for as listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Examination Documentation:

a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 125 of 297


22 15 00 - 9

examinations, NDEs, and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.

b. Required examinations shall be completed and documented before starting leak testing.

c. Weld Examination and Test Record information may be incorporated on a single format or traveler for a specific work package.

d. Document examination of attachment welds to pressure-retaining components by recording on sketches or Weld Examination and Test Record.

B. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi.

2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.

3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.

4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.

5. Install necessary restraining devices, before applying test pressure, to prevent distortion or displacement of piping. Remove temporary restraining devices following testing.

6. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures.

7. Visually examine piping joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources, including welds that attach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems, during testing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 126 of 297


22 15 00 - 10

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Schedule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing

NDE/NDT Method “Compressed Air” Visual A Fit Root Pass Cover Pass Liquid Penetrant Root Pass Cover Pass Magnetic Particle Root Pass Cover Pass Radiographic Completed Weld Ultrasonic Completed Weld Pressure Completed Weld B Other

Legend: A. All completed welds to have visual examination by

AWS QC1 qualified weld inspector in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1.

B. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 127 of 297


22 15 00 - 11

B. Components List

Compressed Air

Service Max Operating Pressure (psig)

Test Pressure (psig)

Max Operating Temp ( F)

Service Air (SA) 150 200 150

Sizes 3/4 in. and smaller 1 in. and larger Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if

indicated as threaded on the Drawings). Nipples Schedule 80S. Schedule 80S. Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in

accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS-SP-97. Unions Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, threaded or socket welded in

accordance with ASME B16.11. O-ring Unions 304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000,

Manufacturer: Hart Industries. Valves - Gate None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351,

Class 150, OS&Y bonnet, flexible or solid wedge disc, socket weld ends, Aloyco figure 114.

Valves - Ball Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

Valves - Check None. Spring-assisted, non-slam, in-line, socket weld, 750 CWP, ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Body, 316 stainless spring, Zelon®20 O-ring, DFT®20 Inc. Model SCV.


20 Zelon and DFT is a registered trademark of DFT, Inc., Exton, Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 128 of 297


23 31 01 - 1

SECTION 23 31 01

TANK VENTILATION DUCTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes waste retrieval tank ventilation ductwork and housing assembly installation, cleaning, inspection, and testing.





ASME AG-1, 2012 Code on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment


ASNT SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A and ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel

C. Hanford Documents

H-14-109924 241-AX Ventilation Site Plan

OSD-T151-00013 Operating Specifications for Single-Shell Waste Storage Tanks

TFC-ENG-STD-07 Ventilation System Design Standard

RPP-CALC-57515 AX-Farm Tank Exhaust System Duct Loss and Performance Curve

RPP-CALC-57516 AG-1 Duct Volume, Pressure Test Criteria Calculation

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 129 of 297


23 31 01 - 2

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. No variation of duct configuration is permitted except by the approved design documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Inspection and test reports indicating inspections and tests performed. Include inspection data, test procedures, test parameters (pressures and allowable leak rates), date, section tested, instruments used (manufacturer, model, range, calibration expiration date), and all applicable calculation and test data sheets.


A. Construct ductwork in accordance with design documentation.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years experience.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 DUCT MATERIAL

A. Duct and housing materials must be in accordance with design documentation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and support ductwork and housing assemblies in accordance with design documents and Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 130 of 297


23 31 01 - 3

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal and taped polyethylene over open ductwork and housings to prevent foreign matter from entering ductwork system.

C. Install flexible connection with minimum 1-in. slack immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment.

3.2 CLEANING

A. During system installation, wipe/clean the interior surfaces of all ducts, housings, and components as required to remove dust and debris.

3.3 DUCT LEAKAGE

A. Inspect and test assembled duct and housing systems. Joints that are not testable after field installation (such as riser connections, adapter assemblies between the tank and tank isolation valve) that were tested after fabrication testing do not require testing.

B. Perform visual inspections and leak testing in accordance with ASME AG-1. Test parameters are shown in Table 3.3B.

Note: Do not disassemble Inlet Assembly or Ductwork after testing is complete. If the assemblies are disassembled for any reason, they must be retested.

Table 3.3B: Ventilation Ductwork Test Parameters for POR1268 and POR1279

Component Test Description Test Parameter Exhaust Ductwork Assembly

Pressure Decay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate with Exhauster

18 scfm (max)1,8,9

Pressure Decay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate Without Exhauster

15 scfm (max)2,8,9

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate for Moisture Separator Only

0.327 scfm (max)3

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate for Individual Duct Components4

See RPP-CALC-57516

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Pressure -40.0 ± 1 in wg.5

Tank Air Inlet Assembly (w/o Vacuum Controller)

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate 3.7 scfm (max)6

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Pressure -3 + 1 in wg.7

1Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.6% times flow rate or 3000 scfm). 2Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 3000 scfm). 3Based on RPP-CALC-57516, Table 1. 4Any combination of the duct sections can be tested at the same time as long as the total leak rate from all sections does not exceed 15 scfm. 5Based on 125% of maximum fan pressure, see VI-50645. 6Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 745 scfm), see RPP-CALC-57515. 7Based on 125% of -2.4 in. w.g. Limit in OSD-T151-00013. 8Tests using POR126 require valve AX241-VTP-V-005 to be shut prior to execution of test. 9Tests using POR127 require valve AX241-VTP-V-001 to be shut prior to execution of test.

C. Remake any leaking joints and repeat test. Record results on a new data sheet.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 131 of 297


23 31 13 – 1

SECTION 23 31 13

AIR COMPRESSOR METAL DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes ventilation ductwork and duct sealing for the exhaust cooling air of the Air and Water Service Building 241-A-285 air compressor unit.


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.




ASTM A90 Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings


B. American Welding Society (AWS)


AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel

AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS)

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 132 of 297


23 31 13 – 2

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1520 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards

SMACNA 1922 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 181A Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts


A. Construct ductwork in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and NFPA 90A.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

C. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 steel.

2.2 WALL LOUVER

A. The exhaust louver shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably finished to resist corrosion.

B. Size, and location shall be as shown on drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 133 of 297


23 31 13 – 3

2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ductwork, duct access doors, and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Furnish duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for design pressure class indicated.

B. Construct T’s, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1 1/2 times centerline duct width.

C. Fabricate continuously welded round duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard.

D. Provide, at minimum, rectangular 45 degree entry fittings for rectangular ducts and 45 degree wye takeoffs for round ducts.

E. Duct sizes noted are inside clear dimensions. No variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is permitted except by written permission from the Buyer’s Technical Representative. Round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts shall be sized in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

F. Increase duct size gradually, not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever possible. Do not exceed 30-degree divergence upstream of equipment. Do not exceed 45-degree convergence downstream of equipment.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports for ducting as necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify sizes of equipment connection before fabricating transitions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install, seal, and support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 134 of 297


23 31 13 – 4

E. Repair damaged galvanized ductwork surfaces (welds, scratches, etc.) by applying minimum 2 coats of a zinc base paint.

F. Install wall louver as shown on drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes is permitted except by written permission from engineering.

B. The ductwork provided per this Specification shall interface with the HVAC Systems procured via the design drawings.

C. Any proposed changes to existing equipment to facilitate installation of the ductwork shall be discussed with and approved by the Owner prior to proceeding.

D. All indoor supply ductwork shall be flanged in spool piece sizes, as determined by installation contractor, to accommodate field obstructions and installation limitations.

E. No welding is allowed within the facility or to existing structures within the facility. All ductwork and supports shall accommodate this requirement in the design.

F. As much as field conditions allow, slope all horizontal duct runs away from the air compressor unit. Slope shall be a minimum of 1/16” per foot.

3.4 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION

A. Construct ducting for a minimum pressure classification of 1.5 in. w.g.

3.5 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints in accordance to the duct pressure classification as described in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.

B. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape.

1. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings.

2. Do not use sealing products not bearing UL approval markings.

C. Do not use pressure-sensitive sealant on ducts with a pressure class of 1 in. w.g. or greater.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 135 of 297


26 05 19 – 1

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Building wire (600V).

B. TC cable (2000V and 600V).

C. Wire and cable connectors.

D. Insulating tape and tubing.

E. Wire pulling lubricant.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American Standards for Testing and materials (ASTM)

ASTM B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM D3005 Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 422 IEEE Guide for the Design and Installation of Cable Systems in Power Generating Stations

IEEE 1210 Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 136 of 297


26 05 19 – 2


UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors

UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 486D Sealed Wire Connector Systems

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 1277 Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents including specified certifications and all field test reports.

2. Cable pulling records required in Building Wire Installation.

3.


1. Catalog Data: Compression connectors; conductors/cables; indicate installation tools and dies that will be used.

2.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 137 of 297


26 05 19 – 3

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.

1.7 PERMITS

Not used.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 BUILDING WIRE

A. Provide NRTL-listed building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following characteristics:

1. Description: Single conductor 600, 90°C insulated wire.

2. Conductor:

a. 98% conductivity, annealed, uncoated copper (per ASTM B3) solid or stranded as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Insulation: The following types, rated 600V:

a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1 AWG and smaller, Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL 83.

b. 1/0 AWG and larger, Type XHHW per UL 44.

B. Multi-conductor portable power cables shall be 600V rated for extra hard usage Type G or W per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and shall be rated for sun light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding conductor.

C. Multi-conductor portable control cables shall be 600V extra hard usage such as Type SOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding conductor.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 138 of 297


26 05 19 – 4

D. Signal cables shall be 600V Type SOOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light and wet locations and contain a braid shield or drain wire.

E. Heat trace cable shall be the self-regulating type as shown on the drawings.

F. Color code conductors as follows:

1. Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.

2. Use water and oil resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4 in. minimum width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger. Manufacturer: 3M™21 ”Scotch®21 35”

3. Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color coding.

4. Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:

Conductor Color Codes System

Voltage:

Conductor:

480Y/277V 208Y/120V 120/240V

Phase A: Red Black Black Phase B: Yellow Purple Brown Phase C: Blue Brown --- Grounded (Neutral):

White/Gray White/Gray White/Gray

Equipment Grounding:

Green Green Green

Isolated Ground:

--- --- ---

Switched: Purple Pink Blue

5. Use the following color codes for DC power system conductors:

Positive: Red Negative: Black

6. Provide color code for control conductors as indicated on equipment or control system manufacturer’s drawings.

21 3M, Scotch, Scotchlok, Scotchrap, and Scotchfil are trademarks or registered trademarks of 3M Company, St. Paul, Minnesota.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 139 of 297


26 05 19 – 5

2.3 TC-ER CABLE

A. Provide tray cable (Type TC-ER) that complies with UL 1277, the NEC, and this Section.

B. TC-ER cable shall be rated 90°C, minimum of 600V insulation rating, UL listed, sunlight and weather resistant, rated for direct burial and rated for variable frequency drive (VFD) use where specified on the drawings. TC cable rated for VFD use shall have a 2,000V insulation rating.

C. Provide TC-ER cables with quantities and sizes (minimum 12 AWG) of conductors as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide TC-ER cable rated for VFD as shown on the Drawings.

E. TC-ER cable manufacturer: General Cable or equal.

2.4 CABLE PROTECTORS

A. Cable Protectors: Where cables require protection from vehicle or pedestrian traffic, use a cable protector such as Yellow Jacket®22, Bumblebee®22, or Cable Guard®22. Cable Guard or other engineering approved protection shall be used at vehicle and crane crossings.

2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use Pressure type, or spring type rated for use with copper conductors with insulating caps or covers rated for 600V and 105°C that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C. Thomas and Betts Corporation “Sta-Kon®23,” 3M Company “Scotchlok®21,” or approved substitute, where required by the NEC.

B. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the following materials:

1. Tin-plated copper split-bolt connectors that meet the requirements in UL 486A-486B; provide with matching 600V snap-on insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “Type KSA” with “Type SC” insulating cover.

2. Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B that have two or more range-taking mechanical lugs and matching 600V insulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP” or “UNITAP,” Ilsco “Type PCT,” Blackburn “AMT.”

22 Yellow Jacket, Bumblebee, Cable Guard are registered trademarks of Peterson Systems International, Inc. 23 Sta-Kon is a registered trademark of Thomas and Betts Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 140 of 297


26 05 19 – 6

C. For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B listed circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.

1. Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index/color code, and number/locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types “YA,” “YA-L,” “YA-L-NT,” “YS,” and “YC-C.” Thomas & Betts “Color-Keyed.”

2. Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps. Each adapter shall include a 600V, 90°C rated insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”

3. Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable for control wiring. Use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation grip that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturer: 3M ”Scotchlok MNG,” Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”

4. Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs.

5. Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks.

D. Insulation-piercing type connectors are not acceptable for power or control wiring.

2.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING

A. For making re-enterable tape-insulated splices and connections, provide varnished cambric electrical insulating tape made of cotton cambric fabric that is oil primed and coated with electrical insulating varnish. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 2510” (no adhesive) and “Scotch 2520” (pressure-sensitive adhesive).

B. Insulate taped splices and connections using ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and is rated for 90°C continuous operation and 130°C short-term overload service. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 130C.”

C. For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices and connections use vinyl plastic tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and has the following characteristics:

1. 8.5 mil minimum thickness.

2. ASTM D3005, Rated 600V and 105°C, suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 141 of 297


26 05 19 – 7

3. Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from 0 through 100°F without loss of physical or electrical properties.

4. Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.

5. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88.”

D. Provide heat shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D and has the following characteristics:

1. Rated 600V.

2. Factory applied adhesive/sealant.

3. Split resistant.

4. Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN.”

E. Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series.”

2.7 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT

A. Provide NRTL-listed wire pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor insulation or jacket, has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and leaves no flammable residue. For cold weather installations, provide wire pulling lubricant suitable for conduit temperature.

B. Compatibility with conductor insulation shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 1210.

C. Manufacturer:

1. For conduit temperature above freezing: American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater®24” “Lubricant J.”

2. For conduit temperature below freezing: American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater” “Lubricant WJ.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.

24 Polywater is a registered trademark of American Polywater Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 142 of 297


26 05 19 – 8

C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

E. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required to meet field conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

C. Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +15°F. Store cold cables for at least 24 hours in a heated building prior to installation.

3.3 BUILDING WIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install building wire according to, the NEC, the requirements in this Section.

B. Do not bend cables installed in raceways to less than manufacturer’s recommended bending radii. Lay cables in raceways in straight, parallel lines, and avoid crossing.

1. Use lubricant recommended by wire or cable manufacturer, or wire-pulling compound specified when pulling wire and cable through conduit.

2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when ambient temperature is 15°F or lower.

3. Identify conductors, by wire numbers shown on the Drawings, with wiremarkers. Attach wiremarkers at termination points within 2-in. of wire terminations. Marker nomenclature shall be visible without moving wires or markers.

C. Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.

1. Calculate expected cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressures for each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between accessible pull points:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 143 of 297


26 05 19 – 9

a. 4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 ft of raceway.

b. 3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 40 ft of raceway.

c. 2 equivalent 90-degree bends and 80 ft of raceway.

d. 1 equivalent 90-degree bend and 150 ft of raceway.

e. Straight pull with more than 250 ft of raceway.

2. For cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure calculations use formulas and factors described in IEEE 422.

3. Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the following maximum allowable values:

a. Maximum sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft.

b. Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil

c. Maximum tension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket: 2000 lb, not to exceed 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.

4. Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on runs where cable pulling calculations indicate installation stresses may exceed 80% of allowable pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.

a. Record the maximum measured pulling tension for each monitored cable pull.

b. Submit the recorded cable pulling tension for each monitored cable pull and the corresponding calculated allowable pulling tension.

5. Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on each pull of conductors where a pulling winch is used. Record and submit the maximum measured pulling tension for each cable pull.

6. No tension monitoring devices are required where hand pull techniques are used.

D. Use solid copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for building outlets and lighting branch circuits. Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings, or cabinets where a change of raceway alignment occurs.

3.4 TYPE TC CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install TC cables according to the NEC and requirements in this Section.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 144 of 297


26 05 19 – 10

B. Install and support Type TC cables as required in Article 336 of the NEC.

3.5 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.

C. Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.

D. Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or terminals.

E. Make connections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors immediately before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.

F. Connect conductors 1/0 AWG and larger using compression terminals at the locations described below. Compression terminals shall be installed where there is adequate wire bending space to accommodate compression terminals. Select compression terminals suitable for the conductor sizes, materials, and termination point configurations. Install compression terminals using the manufacturer’s recommended dies and minimum 12-ton force compression tools.

1. Circuit breakers with frame size greater than 100 amperes that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

2. Safety switches and fused switches rated more than 100 amperes.

3. Transformers; refer to Section 26 22 13, “Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers.”

4. Switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and similar service and distribution equipment.

5. Utilization equipment connections that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

G. For conductors sized 1/0 AWG and larger, and where compression lugs cannot be installed, connect using mechanical lugs, in the locations or conditions described below.

1. Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or compression adapters.

2. Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either compression terminals or compression adapters.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 145 of 297


26 05 19 – 11

H. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.

3.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING INSTALLATION

A. Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers or insulating tape built up to not less than 150% of insulation rating of conductor.

1. Apply varnished cambric tape over connections where re-entry is likely, such as motor lead connections.

2. Use rubber insulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic insulation over splices and taps.

3. Use vinyl plastic tape in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective covering over splices and taps.

C. Insulate cylinder shaped splices and taps, connector barrels and adapter barrels using heat shrinkable insulating tubing, insulating covers manufactured for the connector, or tape insulation as described above.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.

C. Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splice, junction, and pull box.


A. Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.

1. Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or cables with material or manufacturing defects.

2. Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked, dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 146 of 297


26 05 19 – 12

B. After installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuit is energized, show product capability and compliance with requirements and verify by documented inspections and tests.

C. Perform the following inspections:

1. Inspect conductors and cables for:

a. Freedom from material defect or physical damage.

b. Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type.

c. Correct color coding and identification.

2. Inspect connections for:

a. Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications.

b. The use of the correct compression dies and the correct number of crimps on compression connectors in accordance with the connector manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Perform the following tests:

1. Before connecting conductors to equipment, use a megohmmeter in a 1-minute test to verify the insulation integrity of each service conductor and feeder conductor with respect to ground and other conductors in the same raceway.

a. Use 1000VDC to test conductors rated 600 and 2000V and 500VDC for conductors rated 300V or less.

b. Insulation test values shall be in accordance with the following:

i Conductors with 300V insulation rating and insulation resistances over 25 megohms are acceptable.

ii Conductors with 600V insulation rating and insulation resistances over 100 megohms are acceptable.

iii Conductors with 2000V insulation rating and insulation resistances over 500 megohms are acceptable.

c. Conductors with insulation resistances less than indicated above shall be investigated.

2. Prior to connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity to ensure proper circuit is identified to facilitate correct connection of each power circuit conductor and each control circuit conductor.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 147 of 297


26 05 19 – 13

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment.

4. Perform insulation (megger) test on electric heat trace cable at installation before and after insulation is installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Measure and record the tightness of not less than 10% of each size and type of mechanical or bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver. Additionally, verify proper crimping method, as applicable.

a. Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the connector manufacturer or as shown in Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”

b. If any connection is found to be less than 90% of the recommended torque, notify the Buyer’s Technical Representative and re-torque all bolted connections on the Project.

E. Remove and replace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and connectors. Re-inspect and re-test replacement conductors and connectors.

F. Submit test and inspection records to the Buyer’s Technical Representative.

G. Verify inspections and tests required by other sections are completed before conductors may be energized.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 148 of 297


26 05 19 – Att. 1–1


RECOMMENDED TIGHTENING TORQUE PER UL 486A-486B

Table 21 - Tightening torque for screws Conductor Size installed in

Connector

Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in) Slotted Head No. 10 and Larger* Hexagonal Head – External Drive

Socket Wrench Slot Width – 1.2mm (.047 in) or Less and Slot Length – 6.4mm

(1/4 in.) or less

Slot Width – Over 1.2mm (.047 in) or Slot Length – Over 6.4mm (1/4 in.) or

less

AWG or kcmil mm2 Split-Bolt

Connectors Other

Connectors

30 - 10 .05 - 5.3 2.3 (20) 4.0 (35) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75) 8 8.4 2.8 (25) 4.5 (40) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)

6 - 4 13.2 - 21.2 4.0 (35) 5.1 (45) 18.6 (165) 12.4 (110) 3 26.7 4.0 (35) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150) 2 33.6 4.5 (40) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150) 1 42.4 - 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)

1/0 - 2/0 53.5 - 67.4 - 5.6 (50) 43.5 (385) 20.3 (180) 3/0 - 4/0 85.0 - 107.2 - 5.6 (50) 56.5 (500) 28.2 (250) 250 - 350 127 - 177 - 5.6 (50) 73.4 (650) 36.7 (325)

400 203 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 36.7 (325) 500 253 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 42.4 (375)

600 - 750 304 - 380 - 5.6 (50) 113.0 (1000) 42.4 (375) 800 - 1000 406 - 508 - 5.6 (50) 124.3 (1100) 56.5 (500)

1250 - 2000 635 - 1000 - - 124.3 (1100) 67.8 (600) * For values of slot width or length not corresponding to those specified, select the largest torque value associated with the conductor size. Slot width is the nominal design value. Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot. Table 22 - Tightening torque for slotted head screws smaller than No. 10 intended for use with 8 AWG (8.4 mm2 ) or smaller conductors

Slot Length of Screw* Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in) Slot Width of Screw Smaller than 1.2mm

(.047 in.)

Slot Width of Screw 1.2mm (.047 in.) and larger** mm inch

Less than 4 Less than 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.0 (9)

4 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12) 4.8 3/16 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12) 5.6 7/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12) 6.4 1/4 1.0 (9) 1.4 (12) 7.1 9/32 - 1.7 (15)

Above 7.1 Above 9/32 - 2.3 (20) * For slot lengths of intermediate values, select torques pertaining to next shorter slot length. Also see Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means. Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot. ** Slot width is the nominal design value

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 149 of 297


26 05 19 – Att. 1–2

Table 23 - Tightening torque for screws with recessed allen or square drives Socket Width Across Flats* Tightening Torque, N•m

(lbf-in) mm inch 3.2 1/8 5.1 (45) 4.0 5/32 11.3 (100) 4.8 3/16 13.6 (120) 5.6 7/32 16.9 (150) 6.4 1/4 25.4 (225) 7.9 5/16 33.9 (300) 9.5 3/8 45.2 (400) 12.7 1/2 56.6 (500) 14.3 9/16 67.8 (600)

* See Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 150 of 297


26 05 26 – 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Connection to Main Grounding Electrode System.

B. Circuit and System Grounding.

C. Enclosure and Equipment Grounding System.




A. American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System

IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

IEEE 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections used in Substation Grounding



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 151 of 297


26 05 26 – 2


UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors

UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for grounding conductors, grounding clamps, grounding bushings, grounding plates, grounding bars, exothermic weld materials, and compression grounding connector materials.

2. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include specified certifications and field test reports of installed grounding systems.



B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1.5 RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING

A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8.

B. Provide ground electrode conductor for separately derived systems and equipment in the Tank Farm and bond to nearest tank riser.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 152 of 297


26 05 26 – 3

2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.

B. Use solid grounding conductors 12 AWG and smaller where not subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

C. Use stranded grounding conductors for 10 AWG and larger.

D. Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

E. Color code grounding conductors as follows:

1. Equipment ground:

a. Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.

b. Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black colored insulation with 3/4 in. wide band of water and oil-resistant green plastic adhesive tape.

2.4 GROUND PLATES

A. Provide ground plates designed for flush mounting in concrete structures.

B. Furnish copper alloy castings with four 1/2 in. x 13 in. threaded holes at 1.75 in. x 1.75 in. NEMA spacing and a welding stud or compression connection suitable for 2 AWG to 250 kcmil copper conductor.

C. Manufacturer: Burndy “YGF.”

2.5 CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Type “BLG.”

2.6 EXOTHERMIC WELD GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.

B. In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.

C. Match mold and weld material-to-material types, shapes, and sizes to be joined.

D. Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 153 of 297


26 05 26 – 4

2.7 COMPRESSION GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making irreversible compression grounding connections.

B. Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE 837.

C. Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that match the connectors.

D. Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be joined.

E. Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars, ground plates, and equipment ground pads.

F. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground®25.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Grounding cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Install and route cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact locations, routing, and lengths required to meet project conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine equipment and building finishes that are to receive grounding and bonding material for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

25 Hyground is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 154 of 297


26 05 26 – 5

3.3 GENERAL

A. Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section, and the Drawings.

B. Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

C. Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Use compression or bolted grounding connection methods in the Tank Farm areas:

1. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of dissimilar materials.

2. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of like materials.

3. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for accessible connections.

4. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment; acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy stainless steel.

5. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel tamper-resistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers, and toothed lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist loosening with common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners include penta-head, break-away, and oval designs.

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in Section 26 05 19, Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.” Use a calibrated torque wrench.

E. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Follow connector manufacturer’s installation instructions and use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed.

F. Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 155 of 297


26 05 26 – 6

G. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.

4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

3.4 MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Install in accordance with the NEC and the Drawings.

B. Concrete encased ground electrode and ground plates are provide in accordance with Specifications below and Drawings.

1. Install a concrete-encased main grounding electrode in the lower part of the perimeter strip footing or grade beam to form a complete and continuous loop around the structure. Encase the electrode with at least 2 in. of concrete from the bottom of the foundation or footing. Use one of the following materials for the electrode:

a. Bare or zinc galvanized or other electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars, minimum 1/2-in. diameter. Bond reinforcing rods together using steel wire ties or other effective means.

b. Bare #2 copper conductor. Space cable from the bottom and sides of the grade beam so it has at least 2 in. of concrete coverage. Bond to the rebar in one place.

c. Perform NEC inspection of main grounding electrode prior to pouring concrete.

C. Install ground plates flush with the concrete slab. Locate ground plates adjacent to switchboard. Bond ground electrode to ground plates with #2 AWG pigtail using UL-listed compression fittings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 156 of 297


26 05 26 – 7

D. Bond building perimeter structural steel column to the main grounding electrode via ground plates and ground cables sized as indicated on the Drawings.

3.5 CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the ground plate; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

B. In the service entrance equipment, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to-ground connections on the load side of the service entrance disconnect.

C. Separately Derived Systems:

1. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems (e.g., dry type transformers) to the nearest ground plate (preferred) or building structural steel column; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.

2. At the first system overcurrent device or disconnecting means, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper sized as required by the NEC. For systems in the Tank Farm, provide grounding electrode conductor to nearest tank riser. Sized grounding electrode conductor in accordance with the NEC and use UL Listed pipe grounding clamp or to an existing ground tap on riser with the approval of the Buyer’s Technical Representative (BTR).

3.6 ENCLOSURE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Provide permanent and effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in accordance with NEC requirements, and as further specified or shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide an equipment ground bar, separate from any neutral bar, in all switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment and raceway ground conductors. Make connections to the ground bar using mechanical lugs or compression lugs.

C. Make connections and couplings on metallic conduit systems wrench tight.

D. Grounding Bushings:

1. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduit containing circuits rated 480 VAC or 100 amperes and higher.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 157 of 297


26 05 26 – 8

2. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

3. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

4. Bond conduit grounding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug in switchboard, panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with the NEC.

E. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit.

1. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the grounding terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.

2. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as shown on the Drawings.

F. In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor pigtail.

G. Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a “self-grounding” receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path.


A. General: Perform on-site verification, certification, and acceptance testing of the grounding installation during construction. Verification and testing will be witnessed by designated U.S. Department of Energy representatives.

B. Notify the BTR ten working days in advance of the expected completion of a grounding system installation specified in Part C. Verification and testing can be scheduled in parts or by area depending on the system and construction schedule.

C. Before work is concealed, verify and certify that the following grounding installations have been made correctly:

1. The building grounding electrode system. This includes the bonding of the structural steel columns and bonding of other metallic systems.

2. Ground plates and grounding bars.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 158 of 297


26 05 26 – 9

3. All other underground grounding installations.

D. Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing for building/transformer area grounding electrode system and submit written reports to the BTR. Tests may be witnessed by designated representatives.

1. Perform ground-impedance measurements using the “fall-of-potential” method in accordance with IEEE 81. Use instrumentation specifically designed for ground impedance testing. Provide sufficient spacing of test electrodes so that the plotted curves flatten in the 62% area of the distance between the item under test and the current electrode. When sufficient spacing of electrodes is impractical for the “fall-of-potential” method, perform ground-impedance measurements using either the “intersecting curves method” or the “slope method,” referenced in IEEE 81. Investigate and correct ground resistances that exceed the following values:

a. Service rated more than 50 kVA but less than 2500 kVA: 5 ohms.

2. Test equipment ground resistances for the following items. Measure resistance between the equipment item and the Electrode Ground Plate. Use the “two-point method” of IEEE 81. Investigate and correct equipment ground resistances that exceed 0.5 ohm.

a. Switchboards

E. Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of the ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe any measures taken to improve test results.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 159 of 297


26 05 29 – 1

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install, hangers, supports, anchors, concrete bases, and other positive fastenings for non-structural electrical components such that gravity loads are safely transferred to the structure.





ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 29 Labor Part 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

C. Federal Specification (FS)

FS WW-H-171E Hangers and Supports, Pipe

D. International Code Council (ICC)


E. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS)

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 160 of 297


26 05 29 – 2

F. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA)

MFMA-4 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MFMA-102 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

MFMA-103 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for each type of product specified. Include information substantiating equivalent corrosion resistance to zinc coated steel of alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

2. Test reports: Submit ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. evaluation report for each post-installed concrete or masonry anchor product showing that it complies with the current edition of the IBC and the intended conditions of use.


A. Furnish and install hangers and supports that conform to the drawings and requirements of the following codes and standards:

1. NEC.

B. Where a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) has requirements for such products, provide products that are NRTL listed and labeled for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 161 of 297


26 05 29 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work

2.2 COATINGS AND MATERIALS

A. Furnish products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

B. Furnish products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with hot-dip galvanized coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or material such as stainless steel with inherent corrosion resistant characteristics.

2.3 RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish supports as described below for the installation of raceway systems.

B. Use pressed steel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduits from threaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City “6H Series.”

C. Use malleable iron conduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduit runs across, parallel, or perpendicular to beams, channels, and angle supports. Manufacturer: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC Series.”

D. Support multiple parallel horizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from framing channel materials specified below.

2.4 HANGER RODS

A. Furnish mild steel rods that conform to ASTM A307.

B. Furnish rods that are threaded on both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded with UNC (coarse) thread pitch.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors:

1. Furnish post-installed concrete anchors as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each post-installed anchor shall have an ICC-ES evaluation report stating that the product is compliant with the current edition of the IBC and the intended conditions of use.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 162 of 297


26 05 29 – 4

3. For applications in outdoor, damp, or corrosive locations, furnish stainless steel post-installed anchors.

4. Furnish post-installed expansion, adhesive, and undercut anchors specified in the Contract Statement of Work

5. Powder-actuated threaded studs: Use zinc-plated carbon steel or stainless steel suitable for the intended service:

a. 1/4-20 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti X-W6.

b. 3/8-16 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti W10.

6. Concrete and masonry screw anchors: Heat-treated carbon steel. Manufacturer: Simpson Strong-Tie “Titen HD.”

B. Beam Clamps: NRTL-listed, or compliant with Federal Specification WW-H-171E, or compliant with MSS SP-69 and SP-58.

2.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Furnish U-channel framing systems that conform to MFMA-4 and are fabricated using minimum 12-gage steel.

B. Furnish fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacturer.

C. Manufacturers: B-Line.

2.7 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Furnish steel brackets fabricated from angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install hangers and supports according to the NEC, the requirements in this Section, and specific supporting requirements in other Sections and drawings.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for selection and installation of hangers and supports.

C. Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent supports.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 163 of 297


26 05 29 – 5

D. Install flexible sections in electrical conduits and raceways where they cross expansion joints. Do not support conduits, boxes, raceways, etc., from ceiling suspension wires.

E. Use appropriate, calibrated, special tools when installing devices for which special installation tools are recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive hangers and supports for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 FASTENERS

A. Post-installed concrete expansion anchors: Install in accordance with Section 03 15 00, “Post Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts,” and the product’s ICC-ES report conditions of use.

B. Use beam clamps or machine bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening to metal.

1. When clamping is impractical, obtain approval from the Construction Engineer before drilling, punching, cutting, or welding to building structural steel members for support attachments.

C. Fasten equipment to concrete or masonry with expansion anchors.

D. The use of lead-cinch drop in anchors is not allowed.

E. Torque threaded fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

B. Support three or more parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze hangers.

C. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers.

3.5 BOXES AND CABINETS

A. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure, or by approved brackets or bar hangers, as shown on the Drawings or as required. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to structure on opposite sides of the box.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 164 of 297


26 05 29 – 6

B. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support.

C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards as shown on the Drawings or as required.

3.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Select and install framing channel systems in accordance with MFMA-103.

B. Use framing channel to support electrical equipment that is mounted free of walls.

C. Use framing channel to support equipment mounted on walls that do not have sufficient strength to resist pull-out or wallowing out of equipment mounting bolts.

3.7 HANGER RODS

A. Use minimum 3/8-in. diameter threaded rod; use larger diameter rod as indicated on the Drawings, in other Sections, or in the supported equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 165 of 297


26 05 33 – 1

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Conduits and fittings.

B. Outlet boxes and handholes.

C. Pull and junction boxes.

D. Wireway.




A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway Systems Standard

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA C80.3 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

NEMA FB1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies

NEMA ICS 4 Industrial Control and Systems Terminal Blocks

NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA OS 1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 166 of 297


26 05 33 – 2

NEMA OS 3 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes

NEMA TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit

NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing



D. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE)

SCTE 77 Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory

Electrical Construction Materials Directory

UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical

UL 467 Grounding and bonding Equipment

UL 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 514C Non-Metallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 167 of 297


26 05 33 – 3

UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Handholes; sizes and load rating.



B. Rigid steel conduit. Verify the following:

1. Each length is marked with manufacturer’s name, UL label, and “Rigid Metal Conduit” or “Rigid Steel Conduit.”

C. Conduit fittings/metallic outlet boxes/terminal boxes (rigid, stainless steel). Verify the following:

1. Check one lot or container and verify each item has, at a minimum, the UL symbol and that the shipping label or the container for which the items are shipped contains the manufacturers name, the UL listing, and the type of items shipped. If the item is not marked with the UL symbol or manufacturer’s name, visually inspect the shipping carton of the item to ensure it is in accordance with the UL and manufacturer’s published data.

2. Check one lot or container and verify item size is in accordance with product description.

3. Verify external coating for each item is uniform (rigid steel only) and no damage exists.

4. Verify material used is ferrous metal (rigid or malleable iron only) by performing magnetic test.

D. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

E. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 168 of 297


26 05 33 – 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 COATINGS

A. Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic that is suitable for the environment in which the product will be installed and used.

2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RMC that meets the requirements of UL 6 and NEMA C80.1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.

2.4 PLASTIC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC that meets the requirements of NEMA RN 1.

B. Use factory-fabricated elbows.

C. Furnish 40 mils PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of UL 514B.

D. Furnish Type II PVC (Schedule 40) that meets the requirements of NEMA C80.1.

2.5 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RNC that conforms to UL 651 and NEMA TC 2.

B. Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC 3.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized EMT that conforms to UL 797 and NEMA C80.3.

B. Furnish compression type fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 169 of 297


26 05 33 – 5

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.8 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 360.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

C. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 1 and the NEC.

2.9 INSULATING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105°C rated insulation.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.

2.10 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.

2.11 EXPANSION FITTINGS

A. Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron body, factory-installed packing and a bonding jumper.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX, or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.

C. Lubricant and Sealant

1. Lubricant and Sealant for Conduit Thread: Conductive compound providing anti-seize and corrosion protection. Thomas and Betts Corporation “KOPR-SHIELD®26,” or approved substitute.

26 KOPR-SHIELD is a registered trademark of Jet-Lube, Inc., Houston, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 170 of 297


26 05 33 – 6

2.12 PROTECTION TAPE AND CONDUIT SEALANT

A. Furnish pressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection of metal conduit and fittings. Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50.

B. Furnish plastic insulating tape that complies with UL 510.

C. Furnish electrical color-coding tape that complies with UL 510.

D. Furnish sealing compound for conduit: “Sealex®27” by Porcelain Products Company or “Duct Seal®28” by Gardner-Bender.

2.13 RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE

A. Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in 1-ft increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.

2.14 WIREWAY

A. Provide NRTL listed, wireway with covers, elbows, tees, hangers, and fittings required for a complete system. Wireway shall be rated for environment to be installed.

2.15 OUTLET BOXES

A. Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA OS 3 and the requirements of this Section.

B. Exterior Mounted Enclosures (terminal boxes) shall be: NEMA ICS 6, NEMA Type 4 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

C. For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL 514A.

1. For luminaire outlets use 4 in. x 1 1/2-in. deep (min.) boxes with fixture stud attachment as required to support luminaires.

2. For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 in. x 2 1/8-in. deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

D. For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems, provide outlet boxes that comply with UL 498, UL 514A, UL 514B, and NEMA FB1.

27 Sealex is a registered trademark of Porcelain Products Company. 28 Duct Seal is a registered trademark of Gardner-Bender, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 171 of 297


26 05 33 – 7

1. For lighting fixture outlets use 4 in. x 2 1/16-in. deep (min.) round cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs.

2. For surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4 11/16 square, 2 11/16-in. deep cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

E. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosures: Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

2.16 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Metallic boxes (junction boxes) shall be NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R, 16 or 14 gage steel.

B. For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments, use galvanized sheet steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 1 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 4-in. square x 1 1/2-in. deep with screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

C. For dry locations in dusty environments, use galvanized steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 12 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 6-in. square x 4-in. deep with gasketed covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

D. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 in. trade size, provide 4 11/16-in. square, 2 11/16-in. deep (min.) cast malleable iron pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.

E. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 in. trade size and larger, provide galvanized sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 3R.

F. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water, provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.

G. For in-ground, non-metallic, open-bottom handholes, provide products that are NRTL-listed to SCTE 77.

1. Material: Polymer concrete.

2. Minimum SCTE 77 load rating:

a. Located in sidewalks: Tier 8.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 172 of 297


26 05 33 – 8

b. Located in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway locations: Tier 15.

3. Size: As shown on drawings.

4. Cover: Non-skid cover with stainless steel cover bolts.

5. Identification: Permanent mark or logo on cover prominently identifying the function of the enclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.

6. Manufacturer: Quazite®29 “Style PC, PG, or PT.” or as shown on drawings.

H. Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.

I. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R enclosures: Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Scale dimensions on the Drawings show desired and approximate locations of equipment. Actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by field conditions.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings. Fasten equipment to structural members or metal supports attached to structure or to concrete surfaces

B. Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.

C. Install raceways and boxes according to the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and requirements in this Section.

D. Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

29 Quazite is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Orange, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 173 of 297


26 05 33 – 9

E. Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades. Route as required for a complete wiring system.

F. Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

G. Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements the National Electrical Code, Section 26 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

H. Identify raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

I. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

J. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.

3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 1000 volts) use conduit materials according to the NEC and the following:

1. Outdoors – in Tank Farm:

a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC, minimum 1” diameter. Install with 12-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade for in-farm traffic areas or a minimum depth of 6 in. in non-traffic areas.

2. Outdoors - exposed: Use RMC.

3. Outdoors - concealed: Use RMC for concealed outdoor work. Do not use bare RMC or IMC in direct contact with earth. Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or telecommunications rooms:

a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC.

b. Not exposed to deteriorating agents and not subject to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC or EMT.

4. Indoors – concealed:

a. Within concrete floors: Use RMC.

b. Direct-buried under building floor slabs on grade: PVC-coated rigid. Locate top of conduits not less than 12 in. below the bottom of the concrete slab

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 174 of 297


26 05 33 – 10

5. Connection to vibrating equipment (including hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment) - Use a minimum of 24 in.; maximum length as determined by the NEC:

a. Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

b. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

c. Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

B. For medium-voltage wiring systems (1 kV or greater but less than 100 kV) use conduit materials in accordance with Section 26 10 00, “Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution.”

C. Use 3/4-in. above ground or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.

D. Install conduits with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions.

E. Use specified fitting for conduit except that threaded hubs and sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors and locations where moisture is present. Use couplings where required. Do not use running threads.

F. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.

G. Use galvanized steel locknuts and insulated bushings for attachment to enclosures, except threaded hubs or sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors or where moisture is present. Use watertight fittings for entries into NEMA 4 enclosures. Use sealing locknuts into bottoms of NEMA 4 or 3R enclosures.

H. Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at conduit terminations.

I. Stub-Up Connections:

1. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.

2. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 in. above the floor.

3. Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install threaded insert plugs set flush with the floor.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 175 of 297


26 05 33 – 11

J. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduits dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

K. Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer’s instructions. Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

L. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with approved bending devices.

M. Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 in. trade size; use plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC.

N. Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104°F (40°C):

1. 6 in. at perpendicular crossings.

2. 12 in. between parallel runs.

O. Cut ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.

P. Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

Q. Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil using half-lapped wrappings.

R. Install grounding bushings at the following locations:

1. At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.

2. On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

3. On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

S. Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 in. of slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 176 of 297


26 05 33 – 12

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install an NRTL approved firestop system at each electrical penetration in a fire-rated wall, floor, or partition.

B. At least two days prior to firestopping installation, notify Project/System Engineer so that arrangements can be made for inspection during installation.

3.6 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Receptacle, telephone and data outlets:

a. 48-in. above finished floor unless otherwise noted.

b. Outside 18-in. above grade.

2. Light switches: Center 48-in. above finished floor and within 6 in. of door frame.

3. Thermostats: Center 48-in. above finished floor.

B. Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other and group them symmetrically.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26, “Wiring Devices.”

D. Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional type boxes.

E. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

F. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Support boxes independently of conduit.

H. Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.

3.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install pull boxes as required to comply with limits on conduit bends and distance between pull points in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 177 of 297


26 05 33 – 13

C. Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations. Position boxes so covers can be removed. Place boxes to maintain headroom.

3.8 WIREWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install wireways at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Mount plumb and level.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

C. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.


A. For conduits, junction boxes, associated fittings and supports, verify appropriate torque values are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 178 of 297


26 05 53 – 1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Component identification tags.

B. Equipment nameplates.

C. Wire markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Warning signs.

F. Working space labels.

G. Underground warning tape.

H. Arc Flash labels.

I. Conduit labels.




A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code

ANSI Z535.2 Environmental and Facility Safety Signs

ANSI Z535.3 Criteria for Safety Symbols and Labels

ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels

ANSI Z535.5 Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary Hazards)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 179 of 297


26 05 53 – 2


29 CFR 1910.145 Danger and Caution Specifications

C. International Standards Organization (ISO)

ISO 3864 Graphical Symbols Package



NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


UL 969 Marking and Labeling Systems

F. Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product.

2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.

3. Samples:

a. Submit two samples of each type of printed identification products applicable to project.

b. Submit two nameplates illustrating materials and engraving quality.

4. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions, indicating special procedures and installation requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 180 of 297


26 05 53 – 3

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, NFPA 70E, and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Conform to applicable requirements of ANSI Z535.1, Z535.2, Z535.3, Z535.4, and Z535.5.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Subcontract Documents, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project

B. Verify electrical equipment designations with the Tank Farms labeling convention through the Buyer’s Technical Representative (BTR). Ensure labeling format is consistent with TFC-ENG-STD-012.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; as approved by the BTR.

2.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Furnish component identification tags as specified and scheduled on the Drawings and consistent with the labeling format in TFC-ENG-STD-012.

B. Provide tags made of materials shown on the drawings.

2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish equipment nameplates at each switchboard, disconnect switches, distribution panel, transformer, and variable frequency drive (VFD) as specified on the Drawings.

B. Equipment nameplates: Laminated plastic, as shown on Drawings. Engraved nomenclature sharp and clear. Engraved manufacturer’s standard nameplates may be used if equal in quality and legibility.

C. Post conductor color code on each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear assembly, motor control center. Use type-written, adhesive-backed labels.

D. Coordinate equipment nameplate schedule with equipment numbering scheme provided by BTR.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 181 of 297


26 05 53 – 4

2.4 WIRE MARKERS

A. Provide wire markers for power circuit wires.

B. Furnish split sleeve or heat-shrinkable sleeve, wire markers.

C. Locate a wire marker on each conductor at each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, junction boxes, and each load connection.

D. Provide typewritten lettering on wire markers for as-built branch circuit or feeder circuit number.

E. Manufacturer: LEM Products, Inc., Brady, Panduit.

2.5 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Furnish voltage markers for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, cabinets, and conduits.

B. Provide flexible pressure sensitive vinyl markers with minimum 1-in. x 4-in. orange background and black letters.

C. Provide voltage markers with lettering indicating the highest voltage present:

1. 480Y/277 and 480 V system: 480 V.

D. Manufacturer: Electromark, LEM Products, Inc.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

A. Furnish warning signs for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, and cabinets.

B. Use warning signs that conform to ANSI Z535.4 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Provide minimum 2-in. x 4-in. warning signs.

D. Provide warning signs with format and lettering as follows:

1. Signal word: DANGER

2. Signal word panel color: red with safety alert symbol.

3. Word message: Keep Out! Hazardous voltage inside Will shock, burn, or cause death.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 182 of 297


26 05 53 – 5

4. Safety symbol: ISO 3864 “lightning bolt” in yellow triangle.

E. Materials:

1. Use flexible, pressure sensitive, polyester base with polyester overlaminate.

F. Manufacturer: Seton Name Plate Co., Safety Label Solutions, Hazard Communication Systems, Electromark.

2.7 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Provide labels indicating required working clearance at electrical equipment that is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

B. Material:

1. Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL 969 and has a high-adhesion adhesive back.

2. Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.

3. Use a suitable thermal transfer process label-printing machine to generate labels and enter the application-specific information.

4. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for a high-UV environment.

C. Minimum dimensions: 3 1/2 x 1 1/4 in.

D. Use the following label design:

NOTICE Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for #-#/# feet. OSHA-NEC regulations.

1. Signal word: “NOTICE” in 24-point minimum white italic letters on

safety blue panel.

2. Word message: 16-point minimum black or safety blue letters on white background.

a. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or grounded

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 183 of 297


26 05 53 – 6

parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

b. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 1/2 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

c. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on both sides of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 4 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

d. Word message for 0 to150 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

E. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady

2.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Furnish underground warning tape for underground cables, conduits and duct banks.

B. Use 6-in. wide, 0.004-in. thick, polyethylene detectable underground warning tape black lettering and the following background colors:

1. Electric: Red

C. Provide lettering that indicates the type service buried below.

1. Electric: “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”

D. Manufacturer: Utility Safeguard, LLC, Detectable Terra Tape, Reef Industries, Inc.

2.9 ARC FLASH LABELS

A. Install arc flash labels on electrical equipment as required by NEC. Arc Flash Labels to be provided by the BTR.

2.10 CONDUIT LABELING

A. Conduit metal tags shall be affixed to all numbered conduit. Conduit numbers are shown on Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 184 of 297


26 05 53 – 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive identification products for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the identification products. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install electrical identification products only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

E. Clean surface where electrical identification product is to be placed.

F. Use manufacturer’s recommended adhesive for engraved tags and nameplates.

G. Place electrical identification products centered and parallel to equipment lines.

3.3 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Install component identification tag as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Position tags so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Install equipment nameplate or nameplates as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Position nameplates so they can be read from floor or ground.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 185 of 297


26 05 53 – 8

3.5 WIRE MARKERS

A. Install wire markers on power conductors at each appearance in locations such as pull boxes, junction boxes, switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs, and load connections.

B. Position markers so they can be read from the front of the enclosure.

3.6 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Install voltage markers at the following locations and position markers so they can be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each free-standing low-voltage switchboard section.

2. Front of each switchboard, MCC, distribution panel, transformer, and VFD.

3. Cover of each pull box containing low-voltage conductors.

4. Each 2 in. and larger conduit longer than 6 ft; space markers not more than 20 ft on center.

3.7 WARNING SIGNS

A. Install warning signs at the following locations and position signs so they can be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each switchboard disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, and cabinets.

3.8 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Install working space labels in front of switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Any other equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

3.9 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Install underground warning tape in trench above underground conduit, 12-in. minimum below ground surface.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 186 of 297


26 10 00 – 1

SECTION 26 10 00

MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements for material and installation of equipment for the 13.8 kV medium voltage systems.




A. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)

AEIC C56 Specification for Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated for 5kV through 69kV

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI C2, 2012 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

ANSI C37.47 High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnect Switches


ASTM B502 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced

ASTM B549 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced (ACSR/AW)

ASTM D1535 Method for Specifying Color by Munsell System

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 187 of 297


26 10 00 – 2

D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska yellow cedar poles - preservative treatment of incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s document

AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray treatment

E. Factory Mutual (FM)

FM 3990 Less or Nonflammable Liquid-Insulated Transformers

F. Federal Specification (FS)

FS W-C-1094 Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid

TT-S-00230C AMD 2 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)

C57.12.00 General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers

G. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene Insulated Wire & Cable for the Transmission & Distribution

ICEA S-93-639 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA WC 74 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 188 of 297


26 10 00 – 3


J. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 6 Rigid Steel Conduit

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

UL 1072 Medium-Voltage Power Cables

K. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway System Standard

TFC-PRJ-P-C-02 NEC Compliance Inspection

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing the current transformers, watt-hour meter, terminal devices, 13.8 kV fusing, wiring, Vaults, sectionalizing switch, and load break elbows.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for each enclosure, including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type, enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the following:

a. Configuration and current ratings of equipment.

b. Short-circuit current rating of equipment.

c. Rated Voltage and BIL.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components.

3. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include specified certifications and all field test reports.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 189 of 297


26 10 00 – 4


A. Inspections: The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of the NEC, as administered by the NEC electrical inspector and the MSA Electrical Utilities Group for the NESC portion.

B. Electrical Product Acceptability: Electrical equipment shall be listed or labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), such as UL, when a category exists.

Note: NRTLs are listed on the Occupational Safety and Health Administration web site at http://www.osha.gov/dts/otpca/nrtl/index.html#nrtls.

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the listing is appropriate for the equipment specified. For equipment without a listing or label by a NRTL, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain a listing or label. Any component, equipment, assembly, or system without a NRTL listing or label shall be subject to the approval of the NEC electrical inspector.

2. The Seller shall arrange for a WRPS Hanford NEC inspection to occur at Seller’s facility prior to shipping any assembly not covered in whole by a NRTL listing or label.

3. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.

C. Obtain EIPs (Electrical Installation Permit) (Form A-6005-707) prior to performing any electrical installation or modification. See TFC-PRJ-P-C-02, NEC Compliance Inspection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be substituted if approved by the Buyer.

B. Materials

1. Solderless terminals for insulated aerial conductors: circumferential compression type: Burndy Corporation HYLUG Type YA for copper conductors and Type YA-A for aluminum conductors.

C. Conduit:

1. Rigid Steel NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.

2. Conduit And Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid FS W-C-1094

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 190 of 297


26 10 00 – 5

3. Type II PVC (Schedule 40 & 80) UL 651, NEMA C80.1, and FS W-C-1094A.

D. PVC coating on rigid steel conduit: NEMA RN 1, Type A-40, factory applied.

E. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber. Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30-degree angle with normal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut so roof will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line. Roofs and gains shall be brush treated by manufacture with specified preservative. Each gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.

F. Crossarms: Straight-grained Douglas fir, free from twists to within 0.1 in. per foot of length, with bends and twists in only one direction. Apply preservatives to crossarms in accordance with AWPA C25, with retention of 8 pounds per cubic foot.

G. Line Conductors: #4 ACSR (Swanate) in accordance with ASTM B-230, ASTM B-502, and ASTM B-549.

H. Pole line materials: See Attachment A, “Hanford Electrical Utilities Distribution Guide Specifications & Standard Details.”

I. Load Break Elbows: 15 kV Cooper Power Systems 500-10 Series.

J. The cables specified on Drawings as 15 kV shall be single-conductor, shielded, solid-dielectric type rated for 105°C normal operation. The cables shall be listed by UL as Type MV-150 and have a 15,000-V rating. All cables shall be “sunlight resistant.”

K. The conductor shall be stranded copper, sized in accordance with the drawings. The insulation level shall be 133% of rated voltage with a minimum thickness of 220 mils per requirements of ICEA S-68-516, UL 1072, and AEIC C56.

L. The cables shall conform to the following:

1. Cables shall be suitable for use in wet and dry locations, underground duct systems.

2. Conductors shall be Class B Compact Copper, per ICEA S-68-516, Part 2 and UL 1072.

3. Each conductor shall be covered with an extruded semi-conducting polymeric material applied over the surface of the conductor that is compatible with the insulation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 191 of 297


26 10 00 – 6

4. The insulation applied over the extruded strand screen shall be high-quality ethylene propylene blended and compounded within the cable manufacturer’s facilities under optimum conditions of cleanliness.

5. The type of insulation shielding – copper tape shielding: each conductor shall have a bare 5-mil minimum thick copper shielding tape helically applied over the insulation shield with a minimum 25% overlap of the tape width.

6. Wire pulling compound: Electro Compound Company “Y-er Eas,” or American Polywater Corporation “Polywater.”

M. Tape

1. Plastic insulating tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 33+;”

2. Conduit protection tape: 3M Company “Scotchrap®21 No. 50;” and

3. Silicon rubber termination tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 70.”

N. Insulating putty: 3M Company “Scotchfil®21,” General Electric Company No. 8389, or Kearney Company “Airseal.”

O. Provide medium voltage equipment as shown on the Drawings. Transformers are provided by others.

P. Provide Load Break Elbows complete with inserts, on the transformer primary connection: 15 kV, 200A load break connector, Cooper 500-10 series.

Q. Lightning arrestors for transformer: Metal oxide, elbow shaped, with metal oxide varistor, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV), in premolded insulating elbow designed for use with the RTE 200 A 8.3/14.4 kV loadbreak bushings that are on the transformer.

R. Lightning arresters: Pole mounted, distributed valve type, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV)

S. Provide cable terminations rated at 15 kV, heat shrink type with anti-tracking for shielded cable, Raychem HVT Series as shown on the Drawings.


A. Cable inspection: Upon delivery to the worksite, inspect cable and reels for shipping damage such as the following:

1. Marks caused by improper lifting equipment or techniques;

2. Breaks or cuts in outer covering;

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 192 of 297


26 10 00 – 7

3. Damaged jacket or insulation;

4. Reel damage from mishandling; and

5. Damaged or missing high voltage cable and seals.

B. Cable testing: Upon delivery to the worksite, perform direct current (dc) over - potential tests on new cable. The specifics of how to perform the tests will be provided by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

C. Cable Reel Storage

1. Store reels with flanges resting on hard surface or pallet to prevent sinking into the ground;

2. Reel flanges shall not touch cable on other reels;

3. Do not store reels on sides. Store with reel axis horizontal; and

4. Cap or tape cable ends to prevent entrance of moisture.

D. Cable Reel Handling

1. Slings and forklifts shall not contact cable or protective covering;

2. Use spreader bars when lifting reels with bar and sling; and

3. Do not drop reels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Perform work in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-15, the NEC, and ANSI C2.

2. Install products as shown on the drawings, specifications and per the manufacturer’s recommendation for the pad mounted transformer. Use appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which special installation tools are recommended by manufacturers.

3. Conduit excavation and backfill shall be as specified on the Drawings and Division 31.

4. Watthour/VAR meters: Before installation, have meters electrically calibrated by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group. All meter wiring to the current transformers will be by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 193 of 297


26 10 00 – 8

5. Provide all necessary final field adjustments for a complete installation

B. Setting Poles

1. Excavate holes large enough to admit tamping bar around pole at butt. Do not use explosives to excavate holes.

2. Use backfill materials that can be solidly compacted by hand tamping in 6 in. lifts. Compact surplus earth around pole in cone 1 ft high above grade. Add additional backfill where backfill has settled, and tamp before completion of work.

3. Minimum pole depth is 10% of pole height, plus 2’-0”, i.e., set 40-ft poles 6 ft, 0 in. in earth. Measure depth from lowest side, on moderately sloping ground and from point 2 ft, 6 in. from center of pole toward low side on steep slopes, cuts, embankments, or where soil is likely to be washed away from pole.

4. Set poles plumb and in line, except that corners and other strain points that are guyed shall have butts displaced to keep tops in line where feasible. At such locations, rake against strain shall be approximately 3 in. for each 10 ft of height.

5. Backfill holes created by removal of poles and other underground structures to finish grade and solidly compact by hand tamping. Where backfill has settled, place additional backfill and tamp before completion of work.

C. Crossarms

1. Mount at right angles to axis of poles or as shown on the drawings.

2. Bolts shall be of sufficient length for full-thread engagement of nut, but not protrude through poles or arms in excess of 2 in. Bolt ends shall not be cut off. Use square washers with each through-bolt and double-arming bolt to protect pole and crossarms.

D. Guys and Anchors

1. Install anchors to bear against undisturbed earth. Tamp backfill around anchors entire depth of hole. Provide temporary guying required during stringing of conductors. Remove at completion of work.

2. Set guy rods in earth in line with strand and install at least 6 in. above grade.

E. Insulators: Tighten pin insulators on pin threads and adjust top groove so it is parallel with line. Secure hold nuts with palnuts.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 194 of 297


26 10 00 – 9

F. Aerial Conductors

1. Clearances shall be maintained for cables and conductors in accordance with the Drawings, and ANSI C2.

2. String conductors from rotating reels and do not drag along ground nor permit conductors to lie where they may be run over by vehicles. Pull conductors through stringing sheaves or stringing blocks hung on messenger cable, but do not pull around sharp corners. Inspect conductors as they leave reels and cut out weak or damaged sections and splice ends. Do not make splices in adjacent spans, dead end spans, or within 4 ft of support. Install conductors to proper stringing tensions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Make splices under tension mechanically, and electrically secure by compression fittings. Do not use self-gripping or automatic-tension splicing sleeves. Make taps between primary wires, jumpers, etc., with mechanical connectors.

4. Install hot-line stirrups on existing conductors where new feeder taps are made.

5. Sag conductors in accordance with ANSI C2 for medium loading district.

G. Aerial Equipment Grounding

1. Ground fused switches and lightning arresters in accordance with the Drawings. Bond together pole line hardware separated by less than 2 in.

2. Ground systems: Use stranded copper conductors for ground conductors installed in earth. Use solid copper conductors above grade. Make joints connecting copper and galvanized steel above grade and in dry location. Connections may be made with ground rod clamps or exothermic welds.

H. Conduits

1. Use galvanized rigid steel unless specified otherwise on the drawings.

2. Use PVC conduit in contact with earth. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Install concealed conduits as directed with PVC-coated rigid steel elbows with bend radii as long as possible.

4. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with approved bending devices.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 195 of 297


26 10 00 – 10

5. Cut conduit ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.

6. Use one hole clamp equipped with clampbacks or framing strut with clamps to secure conduits as shown on drawings.

7. Set up joints in conduit installed exposed to weather, with high temperature, anti-seize, conduit thread lubricant and sealant.

8. Install exposed conduit stubbing up, straight and plumb, lined up, and uniformly spaced.

9. Install warning tape for underground conduit as shown on the drawings and with materials specified in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

I. Cable Pulling and Terminations

1. Use lubricant recommended by cable manufacturer, or wire-pulling compound specified, when pulling wire and cable through conduit.

2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when ambient temperature is 15°F or below.

3. Make terminations with solderless connectors. Use connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Follow manufacturer’s instructions and directions for stress cones, and cable terminations. Final terminations to power source will be performed by Mission Support Alliance Electric Utilities.

5. Ground pad mounted transformers to ground grid with 4/0 cable.


A. Testing

1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform testing.

2. Use instruments which bear calibration stamps showing dates of calibration and expiration dates of stamps. Calibration and accuracy of instruments shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory having standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment. Notify the NEC electrical inspector

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 196 of 297


26 10 00 – 11

and the Mission Support Alliance Electrical Utilities Group before start of tests. Record the results.

4. Reconnect devices disconnected during testing

B. Acceptance testing: After installation, and prior to energizing, coordinate with MSA Electrical Utilities to perform tests on cable to verify installation acceptability.

C. Verification Points

1. Provide 24-hour notice and hold for release by MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

2. Prior to energizing, perform NEC inspection.

D. Provide three copies of the manufacturer’s field startup report.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 197 of 297


26 22 13 – 1

SECTION 26 22 13

LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General-purpose dry-type low-voltage transformers




A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA TP 1 Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA TP 2 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers

NEMA TP 3 Standard for the Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency



C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory


UL 1561 Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 198 of 297


26 22 13 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Statement of Work and the Project submittal procedures.

1. Catalog Data: Include outline and support point dimensions of transformer enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltages, kVA, impedance, NEMA TP 1 efficiency, sound level, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.

2. Certifications signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with the specified requirements.

3. Operation and maintenance instructions.


B. Submit the following for WRPS review/approval:

1. Acceptance test procedures prior to testing.

2. Final test reports.



B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Provide products that comply with the following industry standards:

1. NEMA TP 1.

2. NEMA TP 2.

3. NEMA TP 3.

4. UL 1561.



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 199 of 297


26 22 13 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work

2.2 GENERAL

A. Transformers shall be NRTL listed to UL 1561 and shall be tested and labeled according to NEMA TP 1, NEMA TP 2, and NEMA TP 3.

B. The efficiency of each transformer shall be NEMA TP 1 Class I when tested in accordance with NEMA TP 2. Transformer efficiency shall be indicated on a label that conforms to NEMA TP 3.

C. Transformer coils may be aluminum or copper with continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Terminations shall be brazed or welded to the coil conductor.

D. Transformer cores shall be constructed of a high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities shall be kept well below the saturation point.

2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. The core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure, isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and the enclosure. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable.

B. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by a flexible grounding conductor sized following applicable UL and NEC Standards.

C. The transformer enclosure shall be ventilated and shall be fabricated of a heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished using a process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder and baking cycle to provide a uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be light or medium grey.

D. Transformers shall be suitable for rack or floor mounting. Provide mounting accessories required for installation.

E. Provide weather shields for transformers installed outdoors.

F. Provide transformer manufacturer’s transformer lug kits with compression type equipment lugs and hardware for connecting conductors to transformer terminals.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 200 of 297


26 22 13 – 4

G. Provide factory assembled and tested, energy-efficient, general-purpose, air cooled, two-winding, dry-type transformers with voltage and kVA ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

H. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient.

I. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity above normal and four 2.5 percent full capacity below normal primary taps.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Square D Class 7400 Type “EE.”

2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer “DS-3”and “DT-3.”

2.4 MINI-POWER ZONE

A. Provide mini-power zone, 480-120/240V, single phase transformer and 120/240V, panelboard in a weather-resistant enclosure. Minipower zone shall be UL listed, surface mounted and sized as shown on the Drawings. Branch and secondary main circuit breakers shall be provided as shown on the panel schedule. Locking mechanisms permanently affixed to the panel board to prevent casual operation of breakers shall be provided.

B. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient.

C. Mini-power zone units shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity below normal primary taps.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Square D, Class 7440 “MiniPower Zone”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned dry-type transformers. (ECN-711492 and ECN-711509)

B. Maintain access to existing dry-type transformers and other installations that are to remain active. Clean and repair existing dry-type transformers that are to remain.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 201 of 297


26 22 13 – 5

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive transformers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the control system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install dry-type transformers where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be available at the construction site.

B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access, replacement, and for cooling air circulation. Locate the front and rear of each ventilated transformer at least 6 in. from the wall or any obstruction to allow proper air circulation.

C. Make conduit connections to transformer enclosure only at locations designated by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Connect conductors to transformer terminals using transformer manufacturer’s lug kits. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not furnished, use those specified Section 26 05 19, Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.” Section 26 05 19, Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”

E. Bond transformers and ground systems served by transformers according to Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

F. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean, inspect, test, adjust, and energize transformers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Inspect each transformer for physical damage, proper connection and grounding, and proper anchorage.

2. Keep records of inspections, tests, and adjustments; submit them to the Buyer’s Technical Representative (BTR).

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 202 of 297


26 22 13 – 6

D. Measure primary and secondary voltages and phase rotation, and make preliminary tap adjustments. After normal operating loads have been energized adjust taps to provide the following voltage at points of use; record voltages and tap settings.

System Nominal Voltage Minimum Load Voltage 480Y/277 460Y/265 208Y/120 200Y/115 120/240 115/230


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 203 of 297


26 24 13 – 1

SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section covers installation of floor-mounted deadfront low-voltage switchboards which consist of an enclosure, circuit breakers, instruments and metering equipment, monitoring equipment or control equipment, with associated interconnections and supporting structures. Uses on Project include:

1. Main Switchboard and Distribution Switchboard - are shown on the Drawings and provided by RPP-SPEC-60125.


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.

The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this section unless otherwise indicated.

A. Factory Mutual (FM) Research Corporation

Approval Guide


RPP-CALC-60221 Electrical Power Distribution Study for A/AX Retrieval Infrastructure

RPP-CALC-60222 Electrical Power Distribution Study for A/AX Retrieval Water Building

RPP-SPEC-60125 Procurement Specification for A/AX Retrieval Project Switchboards

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 100 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

D. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 204 of 297


26 24 13 – 2

NEMA PB 2.1 Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

7 NFPA 0 National Electrical Code (NEC)

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 67 Panelboards


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this Section are as defined in IEEE 100.



B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboard(s) according to the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards.


A. Verify field measurements against manufacturer’s shop drawings prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Switchboards are provided by Procurement Specification RPP-SPEC-60125.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 205 of 297


26 24 13 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive switchboard(s) for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboard(s) where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB-2, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard enclosure and components.

C. Ground and bond switchboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

D. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

1. Terminate conduits in the switchboard section containing the corresponding device.

2. Install plugged couplings set flush with the top of the concrete pad. After switchboard is set in place, extend conduits to 1 1/4-in. above the pad and terminate with insulated grounding bushings.

E. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

1. Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle and secure as recommended by manufacturer to withstand fault current.

2. Use compression type lugs to connect all service, feeder, and branch circuit cables greater than 100 amperes.

3. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including bus bar and grounding connections, according to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify switchboard and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 206 of 297


26 24 13 – 4


A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize switchboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Verify that circuit breakers are in the proper locations and that setting of solid state trip devices and current sensor taps match values scheduled on the Drawings.

C. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.

D. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing switchboard.

E. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections in this Specification.

F. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.

G. Perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study and protective device coordination studies, RPP-CALC-60221 and RPP-CALC-60222.

H. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments, and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with an approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner.

3.5 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE

A. Provide the services of a factory trained representative from the manufacturer to inspect and certify the installation and to oversee energizing and testing.

B. Manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 207 of 297


26 24 16 – 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Panelboards for feeder and branch circuit loads.




A. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality management systems – Requirements

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA AB 3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application

NEMA PB 1 Panelboards

NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less

NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards


NFPA 70, 2014 National electrical Code (NEC)


UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 67 Panelboards

UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 208 of 297


26 24 16 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each panelboard including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type, enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the following:

a. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1.

b. Bus configuration and current ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components.

3. Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, installation, and starting of Product.

4. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit operation and maintenance instructions. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers.



B. Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA AB 3.

D. Comply with UL 67, UL 50, and UL 489.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 209 of 297


26 24 16 – 3

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish six spare keys of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.

B. Furnish one spray can of touch-up paint that matches panelboard finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Furnish panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.

B. Panelboards shall be UL 67 listed and shall conform to NEMA PB1.

C. Furnish panelboard cabinets for surface mounting as indicted on the Drawings.

1. Furnish enclosures as indicated below:

a. Outdoor - NEMA 3R: rated raintight minimum.

b. Indoor - NEMA 12: Dust tight.

2. Cabinets shall be not less than 20-in. wide.

3. Furnish steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50 requirements.

4. NEMA 12, and 4 boxes shall have end walls welded and sealed.

D. Furnish trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.

1. Each panelboard trim front shall include a door.

2. Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over cleaned, phosphatized steel.

3. Furnish a panelboard circuit directory card in a metal frame mounted inside the panelboard door. The directory card shall include spaces for circuit numbers and sufficient spaces to allow each circuit to be described in sufficient detail to be distinguished from all others.

a. Furnish cylindrical tumbler type locks for doors. Furnish sliding vault locks with 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48-in. high. Key all lock assemblies alike. Furnish two keys with each

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 210 of 297


26 24 16 – 4

lock plus spares as required in the Extra Materials paragraph above.

E. Equip panelboards with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the future installation of circuit breakers in the “spaces” scheduled on the Drawings.

F. Furnish panelboards having NRTL-listed short circuit current ratings not less than the available fault current indicated on the Drawings.

G. Furnish thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet the requirements of UL 489 and NEMA AB 3.

1. Furnish circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

3. Furnish multi-pole breakers with a common trip.

4. Furnish bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an independent mechanical locking device.

5. Furnish UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers or UL Class B equipment protection circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings.

6. Furnish circuit breakers with provisions for connecting the size and number of conductors indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” for conductor connection requirements.

H. Furnish a permanently-installed handle lock-off device for each circuit breaker.

1. Furnish handle lock-off device that will accept a 1/4-in. padlock shackle.

2. Securely attach the device to the circuit breaker case; the attachment shall not depending on a friction fit or the presence of the panelboard front for the handle lock-off device to remain in place and be functional.

I. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton:

a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “PRL3a” and “PRL4”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “PRL1a” and “PRL2a”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 211 of 297


26 24 16 – 5

2. Square D:

a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “NF” and “I-LINE”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “NQ” and “I-Line”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Furnish supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

C. Position panelboards so the top circuit breaker handle is not more than 6 ft – 7 in. above the surface of the working space in front of the panelboard.

D. Ground and bond panelboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Furnish typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard.

1. Install a plastic-laminated copy of the panel schedule drawing on the inner side of the panelboard door.

B. Identify panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 212 of 297


26 24 16 – 6

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 213 of 297


26 27 26 – 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Receptacles.

B. Snap switches.

C. Wall plates.




A. Federal Specifications (FS)

FS W-C-596 G/GEN Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for

FS W-P-455A Plate, Wall, Electrical

FS W-S-896 Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification)

B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems -- Requirements

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 214 of 297


26 27 26 – 2


UL 20 General Use Snap Switches

UL 498 Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 943 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

UL 1492 Solid-State Dimming Controls

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for each type of product that is supplied as “OR EQUAL.” Include information substantiating equivalent characteristic.


A. Comply with the NEC.

B. Furnish products listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Provide back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade, and locking type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the performance and design requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596G/GEN and UL 498. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 6.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 215 of 297


26 27 26 – 3

B. For 120 volt receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5362” or equal.

C. For GFCI receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self-testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL 943. Provide units that can be installed in a 2 3/4-in. deep outlet box without an adapter. Manufacturer: Hubbell “GFR5362ST” or equal.

D. Provide straight-blade and twist lock receptacles for special applications as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Provide 480 VAC, 3 wire, 4 pole, receptacles, amperage as shown on drawings. Manufacturer: Crouse Hinds.

2.3 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Provide single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way and illuminated handle snap switches as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes, 120-277 volts AC, back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, quiet type AC switch with yoke grounding screw. Switches shall meet the performance and design requirements of UL 20 and Federal Specification WS896.

C. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL1220” series.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. For surface mounted interior receptacles and switches, furnish galvanized steel 4-in. square raised surface covers. Receptacles installed in raised covers shall be secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO “800” series.

B. For GFCI receptacles in damp or wet locations provide weatherproof, in use covers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26E”

C. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices.

D. Use metal plate-securing screws to match plate finish.

E. Terminal Blocks

1. Terminal Blocks shall meet the requirements of UL 1059 or NEMA ICS 4.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 216 of 297


26 27 26 – 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper locations and heights.

B. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

C. Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products following manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Install devices plumb, level, and secure.

C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount devices with long dimension vertical, and grounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches and receptacles under single, multi-gang wall plates.

D. Do not use the duplex/split-wire break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors for connecting downstream devices.

E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes on surface mounted outlets.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.

B. Operate each operable device at least six times with circuit energized; verify proper operation.

C. Test 20 ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity using an NRTL listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at least 15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 217 of 297


26 27 26 – 5

D. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation according to manufacturer recommendations.

E. Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or damaged wall plates or devices.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 218 of 297


26 28 16 – 1

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Safety switches.

B. Fuses.




A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA FU 1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA KS 1 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices



C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

UL 248 Low-Voltage Fuses


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 219 of 297


26 28 16 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of safety switch and fuse types. Provide catalog sheets showing voltage and current ratings, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

2. Installation Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, installation, and starting of Product.




B. Provide safety switches that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. NEMA KS 1.

2. UL 50.

3. NEMA FU 1.

4. UL 248.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store safety switches, enclosed circuit breakers, and fuses according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one spray can of touch-up paint that matches finish of switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow the guidelines set forth in the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 220 of 297


26 28 16 – 3

2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Provide NRTL-listed, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 or 4 Heavy Duty safety switches with ratings and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NEC suitable for the environment into which it is being installed.

B. Each safety switch shall have an equipment ground bar.

C. Each safety switch shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position.

D. Manufacturer: Square D “Class 3110” or Cutler Hammer “DH” Series.

2.3 FUSES

A. Provide NEMA FU 1 and UL 248 fuses with type, voltage, and current ratings as indicated on drawings.

B. Manufacturer: Cooper/Bussmann or Mersen/Ferraz Shawmut.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings, according to manufacturer’s instructions, and the NEC.

B. Ground and bond safety switches as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

C. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

D. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify safety switches and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Mark floor in front of safety switches to show NEC required working space according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 221 of 297


26 28 16 – 4


A. Clean interior and exterior of safety switches.

B. Verify that ratings of fuses and safety switches match values indicated on the Drawings.

C. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing safety switches. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 222 of 297


26 51 00 – 1

SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Interior luminaires and accessories.




A. International Code Council

IBC International Building Code (IBC)

B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

NECA/IESNA 500 Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

NECA/IESNA 502 Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)



1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Fixture data sheets and installation instructions.

2. Fixture photometrics.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 223 of 297


26 51 00 – 2


A. Comply with the NEC and the IBC for components and installation.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Luminaire: A luminaire is a complete lighting unit and parts required to distribute the light, and connection of the lighting unit to the power supply.

1. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under specified operating and starting condition.

2. Total harmonic distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the fundamental current.


A. Luminaires, shall perform satisfactorily in the following service conditions:

1. Ambient temperature limits: 32 to 104°F unless indicated otherwise for specific products in Part 2.


A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:

1. NECA/IESNA 500.

2. NECA/IESNA 502.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 224 of 297


26 51 00 – 3

2.2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below, indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.

B. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

D. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard finish applied over a corrosion-resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains or defects.

E. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions.

2.3 LUMINAIRE ACCESSORIES

A. Provide supports, mounting brackets, frames, and other accessories required for luminaire installation.

B. Furnish hangers as specified below and as required by conditions of installation:

1. Stem hangers shall be made of steel tubing with swivel ball hanger fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish the same as the luminaire.

2. Rod hangers shall be made of 1/4-in. threaded zinc-plated steel rod.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.

C. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall-mounted fixtures.


A. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 225 of 297


26 56 00 – 1

SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Exterior luminaires and accessories.

B. Grounding.

C. Conduit and wiring.

D. Lighting controls.

E. Wood lighting poles





ANSI 05.1 Wood Pole – Specifications and Dimensions

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures


ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska yellow cedar poles - preservative treatment of incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s document

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 226 of 297


26 56 00 – 2

AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray treatment

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

Lighting Handbook

F. International Code Council

International Building Code

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 1598 Luminaires

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Approval Not Required

1. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion in the operations and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with the following codes and standards:

1. NEC for components and installation.

2. International Building Code.

3. ASCE-7.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing, luminaires, lamps, similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 227 of 297


26 56 00 – 3


A. International Building Code and ASCE 7 design wind conditions:

1. Exposure Category: C

2. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (3-second gust at 33-ft above ground, mean recurrence interval of 50 years)

3. Importance Factor: 1.15

B. Ambient temperatures, °C (°F)

1. -25°F to 115°F

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in this Section are as defined in the NEC or the IESNA Lighting Handbook.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 FINISHES

A. Furnish luminaires and accessories with finishes as scheduled that are resistant to fading, chalking, and other changes due to aging and exposure to heat and ultraviolet light. Acceptable finishes for metals are:

1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M.

2. Brushed natural aluminum.

3. Anodized aluminum: AAMA 611, Class I.

4. Powder coated aluminum: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per AAMA 2605, over chrome phosphate conversion coated aluminum.

5. Powder coated steel: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per AAMA 2605 over zinc phosphate conversion coated shot-blasted steel.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 228 of 297


26 56 00 – 4

B. Reject luminaires and accessories with finish having runs, streaks, stains, and defects.

C. Replace luminaires and accessories showing evidence of yellowing, fading, chalking, and other changes indicating failure during warranty period.

D. Use stainless steel for exposed hardware.

2.3 WOOD POLES

A. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber. Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30 degree angle with normal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut so roof will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line. Roofs and gains shall be brush treated by manufacture with specified preservative. Each gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.

2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES - GENERAL

A. Furnish exterior luminaires that comply with requirements specified on the Drawings.

B. Luminaires shall be NRTL-listed as conforming to UL 1598.

C. Luminaire photometric characteristics shall be based on IESNA-approved methods for photometric measurements performed by a recognized photometric laboratory.

D. Luminaire housing shall be primarily metal.

1. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant aluminum, formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

3. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.

E. Provide lenses, fabricated from materials that are UV stabilized to be resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging or exposure to heat and ultraviolet radiation.

F. Doors shall have resilient gaskets that are heat-resistant and aging-resistant to seal and cushion lens and refractor.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish photoelectric relays or timers to control exterior lighting as indicated on the Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 229 of 297


26 56 00 – 5

B. Furnish a “HAND-OFF-AUTO” control switch and enclosure to facilitate testing of the lighting system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, spaces, and surfaces to receive exterior luminaires and poles for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved drawings.

B. Locations of luminaires and poles shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate luminaire locations with building finishes and building structure. Obtain approval for location changes through Buyer’s Technical Representative (BTR).

C. Set luminaires plumb, square, level and secure.

D. Install surface mounted luminaires directly to exterior wall, building structural steel, or an outlet box which is supported from structure.

E. Install luminaires in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3.4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Install exterior lighting control system components in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions. Have installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Install a HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch in the control system to allow for testing of luminaires.

C. Provide separate control of exterior lighting system as follows:

1. Safety, security, and pedestrian walkway: “ON” at dusk, “OFF” at dawn.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 230 of 297


26 56 00 – 6

3.5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Install conduit system for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

3.6 BUILDING WIRE

A. Install wiring for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”


A. Inspect each installed lighting unit for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Verify proper voltage at equipment served.

C. Test installed luminaires for proper operation.

1. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

2. Replace or repair malfunctioning luminaires and components then re-test.

3. Repeat procedure until all luminaires operate properly.

D. Replace inoperative luminaires.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean each luminaire inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Aim adjustable luminaires to provide required light intensities as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the BTR.

C. Adjust exterior lighting controls to obtain the following performance unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the BTR:

D. “ON” at sunset “OFF” sunrise.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 231 of 297


31 23 00 – 1

SECTION 31 23 00

EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade pavements.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.




A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D653 Standard Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained Fluids

ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)


29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 232 of 297


31 23 00 – 2



TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring

D. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT)

WSDOT M41-10 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Section 9-03.9(3), Crushed Surfacing Base Course

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or near site.

D. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimized upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Lift: Loose (un-compacted) layer of material.

H. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.

I. Selected backfill material: Materials available on-site that WRPS Construction Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 233 of 297


31 23 00 – 3

L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Qualifications for Soils Technician (field inspector).

2. Shoring Plan (if required): Design of shoring shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Washington.


1. Competent person: Before excavation and in writing, submit identity of individual designated Competent Person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.650 and as required by the approved safety and health program.


A. Provide survey control to avoid unauthorized over-excavation.

B. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control.

Document Paragraph Backfill Permit 1.6.A Excavation Permit 1.6.B In-Place Density Tests 3.13.C Soil Compaction Test Report 3.12.C Utility Location Marker Verification 3.12.D 1.6 PERMITS


1. Backfill Permit: Use Attachment 1, Backfill Permit Form.

2. Excavation Permit: Use TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30, “Excavation Permit Form” (Form A-7400-373).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 234 of 297


31 23 00 – 4

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.

C. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and trash for backfill and fill, bedding, and stabilization.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 in. in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within two percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Base Course: Top course conforming to WSDOT M41-10, Section 9-03.9(3), Crushed Surfacing Base Course.

E. Backfill and Fill: Obtain from excavation or locations designated by the Company.

1. Backfill within the Tank Farm using excavation (in-situ) material or 5/8 minus crushed rock.

2. Use of any other imported material will require Project/System Engineer approval.

3. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): See Section 03 30 00.

F. Bedding for Underground Piping, Tubing, Conduit, and Utility Lines: Sand as defined in ASTM D653 or excavated sandy material having less than 20% gravel particles. Gravel particles shall have a maximum dimension of 1/2 in.

G. Location Marker: 3-in. wide, detectable plastic tape imprinted with warning such as “CAUTION - BURIED INSTALLATION BELOW” at maximum 4-ft intervals. “Terra Tape Sentry Line 620” with “Terra Clips,” both by Reef Industries, or approved substitute.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 235 of 297


31 23 00 – 5

H. Stabilization: Crushed rock with maximum fragment size of 3/4 in.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities sidewalks, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperature and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation work shall comply with TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30.

B. Excavation shall be defined to mean any hand digging or machine digging below original grade. These requirements constitute the need for an “Excavation Permit” (Form A-7400-373). If an excavation permit is not required, this section does not apply.

C. Notify Project/System Engineer before excavation.

D. Locate and expose underground utilities using subsurface scanning and hand tools, or other methods if approved by the Project/System Engineer.

E. If cultural properties (e.g., bones and artifacts) are encountered, stop excavation and notify the Company. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

F. If unexpected debris is encountered, stop excavation and notify the Project/System Engineer. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

G. Excavation of contaminated soil will be administered in accordance with contractor procedures and programs.

H. Excavate earth and establish protective systems in accordance with the approved safety and health program.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 2 in. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 236 of 297


31 23 00 – 6

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Minimize disturbance to bottom of excavation. Some over-excavation will likely be needed. Excavation shall be trimmed out with crushed rock fill and compacted before placing foundations.

2. Make excavation bottom compact, level, true and free of loose material. Correct over-excavation by extending concrete down to undisturbed earth at time of concrete placement or by placing and compacting structural backfill and fill.

B. In-Situ Soils

1. If not contaminated, salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill material.

2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-place density tests or use existing testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compaction is to be completed via approved control procedure. Record results for use as standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraph 3.12.)

3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.

4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3 in. below elevations shown on Drawings.

3.4 CONTOURS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Excavation for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line (HIHTL):

1. Excavate deep enough to allow laying HIHTL at line and grade shown on Drawings. Two inches of compacted bedding is required under HIHTL. Correct over-excavation by placing and compacting backfill and fill. Pare holes in trench bottoms for pipe couplings so pipe will bear full length of pipe barrel or pipe section.

2. The Project/System Engineer or designee must review the trench for compliance with design requirements prior to backfilling.

B. Excavation for Conduit Trenches: Excavate to contours and elevations shown on Drawings.

C. Excavation for Common Earthwork: Excavate as needed for general purpose, or as shown on Drawings.

D. Trench bottoms. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to be uniform and even. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Allow for pipe or conduit bedding as indicated.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 237 of 297


31 23 00 – 7

1. Excavate trenches for HIHTL installation 2-in. deeper than elevation required to allow for bedding course. Over excavation for conduit bedding is not required if soil is free of projecting stones and sharp objects.

E. In-Situ Soils

1. Salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill material.

2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-place density tests or use existing testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compaction is to be completed via approved control procedure. Record results for use as standard density during backfill compaction. (see Paragraph 3.7)

3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.

4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3-in. below elevations shown on Drawings.

F. Shoring

1. If conditions require shoring, a Shoring Plan shall be submitted to WRPS for approval. Reference TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 for responsibilities and implementation requirements.

2. Design of shoring shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-06, Section 3.7.

3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slab and pavements to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll when subgrade is wet or saturated.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by WRPS Construction Engineer.

C. Test or inspect subgrade materials as required for compaction requirements as applicable.

3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 238 of 297


31 23 00 – 8

B. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.

C. Do not stockpile excavated soil materials adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.

D. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement.

3.7 BACKFILL AND FILL PREPARATION

A. Remove debris and organic material from area to be backfilled or filled.

B. Do not backfill by sluicing or flooding unless written approval is obtained from Project/System Engineer.

C. Allow concrete to cure before placing backfill against concrete.

D. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.

E. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.

3.8 BACKFILL AND FILL

A. Perform backfilling and filling in accordance with an approved soil/gravel compaction procedure (for example Attachment 2 or Attachment 3).

B. Place specified common or native backfill in even, loose layers not more than 8-in. deep if using Attachment 2, or not more than 6-in. deep if using Attachment 3, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water.

C. Perform initial backfilling and filling in presence of Project/System Engineer/engineering representative.

D. Obtain test results (as applicable) and adjust compaction method, if required.

E. Obtain Project/System Engineer approval before proceeding with backfilling and filling.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 239 of 297


31 23 00 – 9

3.9 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL

A. The Controlled Density Fill (CDF) shall be placed in a uniform manner that will prevent voids or segregation of the bedding and filling materials. If required, the CDF shall be consolidated with internal vibrators.

B. The CDF shall not be subjected to load and shall remain undisturbed by construction activities for a minimum of 24 hours after placement.

3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL - FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS

A. Under Structures: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, curbs, backfill with structural fill, unless otherwise indicated. A minimum of 6 in. of granular fill is required immediately below concrete footings, slabs and other concrete structures.

B. Place loose layers of specified structural backfill and fill evenly up sides of wall to avoid unbalanced loading. Limit each layer that is 24-in. below finish grade to 8-in. depth. Limit each layer in top 24 in. to 4-in. depth.

C. Compact each layer uniformly to 95% of maximum density as determined by specified compaction tests in Paragraph 3.12.

3.11 FINISH GRADING AND STABILIZATION

A. Grade each area disturbed by work to blend into existing contours. Slope area to drain away from structures. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Rake each area to remove surface cobbles larger than 6 in. Dispose of excess material and debris as directed by the Company.

C. Stabilize area with minimum of 1-in. and maximum of a 3-in. course of specified stabilization material.

D. After finish grading and stabilization, remove surface markers and flags.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified geotechnical/soils engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill lift. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously complete work comply with requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 240 of 297


31 23 00 – 10

C. Compaction Testing (not required if using Attachment 2, “Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of Existing Soils within Tank Farms” or Attachment 3, “Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of 5/8 Minus Crushed Rock”)

1. Test compacted backfill and fill at the following intervals.

a. Backfill and fill: one test of each layer, each layer shall not exceed 8 in.

2. Perform compaction testing in accordance with the following standards. Provide report required by each standard.

a. Compaction control: ASTM D1557.

i In-place density: ASTM D6938. Each layer shall be as dense as the existing soil density (Paragraph 3.1.H.2) and compacted uniformly to 95% of maximum density as established by compaction tests (per ASTM D1557).

ii Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.

D. Buried Pipe and Utility Location Marker Verification

1. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 241 of 297


31 23 00 - Att. 1–1


BACKFILL PERMIT FORM

Key to Backfill Permit Form Item # Description

1 Permit No. – Sequential number, developed by the Project; i.e., “5-0001.”

2 Self-explanatory.

3 Project title.

4 Example – “22337 Release 5.”

5 Describe location of the backfill; i.e. “Conduit run 001, between Handhole-005 and Handhole-006.”

6 Enter the applicable drawings that show the backfill location.

7 Enter any other reference documents.

8 Discipline Foreman signature, signifying that their work in the excavation to be backfilled is complete. “N/A” will be entered if given discipline is not applicable to the specified backfill area.

9 Quality Signature, signifying that all the quality requirements for the backfill area have been met prior to backfill and backfill may commence.

10 Field Work Supervisor signature, signifying that the all contract requirements for the backfill area have been met and backfill may commence.

11 Enter backfill requirements, typically construction specification reference.

12 “Construction Representative,” this signature would be from the Construction Group, signifying that they agree that all of the requirements for the backfill area have been met and permission to proceed with backfill is granted.

13 Date that “Construction Representative” signed off the form.

14 Date that the applicable discipline foreman, Quality and Field Work Supervisor signed the form.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 242 of 297

RPP

-SPE

C-6

0023

, Rev

. 2

31 2

3 00

- A

tt. 1

–2

BA

CK

FILL

PER

MIT

(1

) N

o.:

(2)

Pro

ject

or W

ork

Pac

kage

No.

: (3

) Ti

tle:

(4)

Con

tract

No.

:

(5)

Des

crip

tion

of B

ackf

ill W

ork

App

rova

ls

(14)

Dat

e

(8

) E

lect

rical

(8)

Pip

ing

(8)

Car

pent

ry

(6)

Dra

win

gs:

(8)

Con

cret

e

(8)

Layo

ut

(8)

Oth

er

(7)

Ref

eren

ce

(8)

Oth

er

(9)

Qua

lity

(10)

FW

S

(11)

Bac

kfill

Req

uire

men

ts

Aut

horiz

atio

n to

Pro

ceed

by

(12)

WR

PS

Con

stru

ctio

n R

epre

sent

ativ

e (1

3) D

ate

RP

P-S

PE

C-6

0023

Rev

.02

11/2

5/20

15 -

9:04

AM

243

of 2

97


31 23 00 - Att. 2-1


PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION OF EXISTING SOILS WITHIN TANK FARMS

PURPOSE This procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of soil backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density gauge.

SCOPE This procedure defines the requirements for placement and compaction of soil backfill including inspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areas defined on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken from Fluor Federal Services Job Bulletin No. JB-RPP-041, Rev. 1, which has been accepted standard practice in the Tank Farms.

In-place testing of compacted backfill including sand bedding by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this procedure. Random periodic visual observation and monitoring of the backfill operation and compactive effort shall be the basis for acceptance.

PROCEDURE Compaction of backfill within the Tank Farms shall be controlled by adherence to this procedure and defined compactive effort within established variables as defined below. Determination of maximum standard density, from testing laboratory reports (proctors) or in situ values obtained from nuclear gauge testing of undisturbed ground is not covered by this procedure.

Only materials as defined by the project specifications will be used for backfill. Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensure that the area to be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material.

Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.

Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 8 in. in depth.

If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to achieve optimum moisture content.

Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 8.5% and may vary as much as plus or minus 2.5% depending on different soil types and gradations. The addition of water to cohesive soil types shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 244 of 297


31 23 00 - Att. 2-2

Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by use of either pneumatic or gas powered compaction equipment such as a Wacker®30, model BS-600 manufactured by Wacker Corporation or equivalent. Alternatively, a pneumatic “Pogo Stick” such as that manufactured by Jet Equipment or equivalent may be used. The use of “Pogo Stick” compaction equipment shall be limited to use in small confined areas such as that found in and around pipes and conduits and small excavations. Alternative compaction equipment may be used if acceptable to the Project/System engineer. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards.

The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:

If a Wacker or equivalent is used, a minimum of three complete passes shall be made. If a “Pogo Stick” type device is used, a minimum of eight complete passes is made.

One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute.

Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content within the optimum range.

Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the Tank Operations Contractor, Washington River Protections Solutions, LLC, for variations from this process that may result in uneven load distribution.

If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundation walls before the curing period is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill Permit.

INSPECTION Control of backfill placement, optimum moisture content, and compactive effort shall be accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified soils technician.

Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification, excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction equipment and methods and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.

Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by visual and physical examination of the wetted material. Cohesive soil containing the correct optimum moisture content shall exhibit no evidence of saturation yet shall have enough moisture 30 Wacker is a registered trademark of Wacker Neuson Production Americas, LLC, Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 245 of 297


31 23 00 - Att. 2-3

to maintain shape when deformed. Physical examination of soil cohesion and plasticity shall be the basis for determining proper moisture content.

The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts, number of passes and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on surveillance reports. The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 246 of 297


31 23 00 - Att. 3-1


PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION OF 5/8 MINUS CRUSHED ROCK

PURPOSE This procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density gauge. SCOPE This procedure defines the requirements for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill including inspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areas defined on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken from American Electric test plan 54891-006-TP-001. In-place testing of compacted backfill by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this procedure. Random periodic visual observation and monitoring of the backfill operation and compactive effort shall be the basis for acceptance. PROCEDURE Compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill shall be controlled by adherence to this procedure and defined compactive effort within established variables as defined below. Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensure that the area to be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material. Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted. Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 6 in. in depth. If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to achieve optimum moisture content. Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 9.5 percent and may vary as much as plus or minus 1.5 percent. The addition of water shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure. Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by use of a Wacker, model BS 50-2 or model WP 1550 AW manufactured by Wacker Corporation

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 247 of 297


31 23 00 - Att. 3-2

or equivalent. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards. The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows: If a Wacker BS 50-2 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 4 complete passes shall be made. If a Wacker WP 1550 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 2 complete passes shall be made. One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute. Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content within the optimum range. Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the TOC Project/System Engineer for variations from this process that may result in uneven load distribution. If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundation walls before the curing period is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill Permit. INSPECTION Control of backfill placement, optimum moisture content and compactive effort shall be accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified soils technician. Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification, excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction equipment and methods, and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations. Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by visual and physical examination of the wetted material. The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts, number of passes, and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on surveillance reports.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 248 of 297


31 23 00 - Att. 3-3

The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 249 of 297


33 10 00 – 1

SECTION 33 10 00

WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of below grade piping from the raw water main line to the backflow preventer in the Air and Water Service Building and of sewer piping to tie into the existing chemical drain line.



The following documents and others referenced therein form part of Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.


ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/ Inch Standard

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping

ASME B40.1 Gauges: Pressure Indicating Dial Type — Elastic Element

ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 250 of 297


33 10 00 – 2

C. American Society of Safety Engineers®31 (ASSE®31)

ASSE 1013 Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection Backflow Preventers


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting

ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure

ASTM A865 Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for use in Steel Pipe Joints

ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A234 Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C552 Specifications for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications

ASTM D2680 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping

ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

31 ASSE is a registered trademark of American Society of Safety Engineers, Des Plaines, Illinois.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 251 of 297


33 10 00 – 3

E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fitting for Water

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151 American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

AWWA C223 Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves

AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service

AWWA C511 Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly

AWWA C600 Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

AWWA M14 Recommended Practice for Backflow Prevention and Cross-Connection Control

F. AWWA Pacific Northwest Section

Cross-Connection Control Manual Accepted Procedures and Practices

G. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)

H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

I. University of Southern California Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 252 of 297


33 10 00 – 4

Manual of Cross-Connection Control

J. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 246-290 Cross Connection Control

K. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)


L. American Welding Society (AWS)


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Gauges: After testing submit for approval vendor information showing that gauges used in testing are calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times test pressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.

2. Flushing: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the flushing operations were performed for a sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning.

3. Mainline: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the mainline is capable of sustaining a 200 psi load for 2 hours or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum static pressure. Measure leakage in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9 for underground piping.

4. Before installation, submit the following vendor information for approval for the Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer Identification: Submit two copies: Dimensional Drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List, by Paragraph 3.4.D.

5. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use start of fabrication, submit two copies of each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

6. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication, submit two copies of welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 253 of 297


33 10 00 – 5

7. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit two copies of documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for information/record.

8. Weld Examinations as required by Paragraph 3.4.A.


1. Filter Vendor information: Submit two copies: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.



B. Qualifications

1. Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and Underground Piping in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.B.3.

2. Qualification of Inspectors: A certified independent testing agency shall perform all required inspections and testing.

3. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

4. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

5. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at the jobsite.

6. Pressure Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS


1. Excavation and Backfill Permit: See the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 254 of 297


33 10 00 – 6



PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Materials shall be ABS plastic sewer pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2680 or shall be PVC plastic sewer pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3034.

B. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings Below Grade

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 150.

a. Joints: Push-on joints, AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.

b. Fittings: AWWA C110, Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron, Class 250 or AWWA C153, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, Class 250 or XTRA FLEX®32 restrained joint high-deflection fittings.

c. Pipe and Fittings: Cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104.

2. Galvanized Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A53, type E or S, galvanized, standard weight, Schedule 40.

a. Joints: Threaded.

b. Fittings: ASTM A865, threaded and galvanized

C. Valves

1. Gate Valves over 2 in.: AWWA C509, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed or FM approved, Class 250, non-rising stem, open left, mechanical joint inlet and outlet with mechanical joint unassembled accessories or Mueller AquaGrip®33 System.

D. Tapping Sleeve: AWWA C223, fabricated steel, suitable for PVC, steel, ductile iron, and cast iron pipe, outlet flange size and sleeve O.D. to suit piping system.

32 XTRA FLEX is a registered trademark of United States Pipe and Foundry Company, LLC, Birmingham, Alabama. 33 AquaGrip is a trademark of Mueller International, LLC, Atlanta, Georgia.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 255 of 297


33 10 00 – 7

E. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron with top section and cover with lettering “WATER” stamped on the cover, bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, barrel approximately 5 in. in diameter, adjustable cast-iron extension of length required.

F. Gaskets: Gaskets containing asbestos are not permitted.

G. Tracer Wire: #10 AWG THHN/THWN, yellow, solid copper.

H. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings

1. Copper Tubing: AWWA C800.

2. Dielectric: Watts Series 3003.

3. Mechanical or Push-On Type Pipe, and Fittings Below Grade.

a. UL listed or FM approved.

b. Megalug®34 malleable iron retainer/restraint gland with epoxy or bituminous outside coating and 1/2-in. minimum diameter asphalt coated tie rods.

c. For PVC, use a compression connection and restraint system, Mueller AquaGrip System.

I. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings from the Inlet to the Backflow Preventor

34 Megalug is a trademark of EBAA Iron Inc., Eastland, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 256 of 297


33 10 00 – 8

Service Design Pressure (psig)

Hydrostatic Test Pressure (psig)

Design Temp (°F)

Inlet to Backflow Preventor 150 225 140 Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. & larger Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless Wall Thickness

Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S.

Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings

Integrally reinforced in accordance with MSS-SP-97

Unions Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, threaded or socket welded in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Flanges None. ASTM A182, Grade F 304L, 150#, forged, raised face, slip-on, weld neck in accordance with ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Bolting None. ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8F, heavy hex nuts.

Gaskets None. Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/8-in. thick, Garlock®35 Blueguard, Style 3700.

Ball Valves (2 way)

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

None.

Gate Valves See associated Drawings.

J. Pipe Casing

1. Raw Water: AWWA C151, Class 150, Ductile Iron Pipe

a. Spacers: Calpico Inc., Model M-Series Casing Insulators or equivalent.

b. End Seals: Calpico Inc., Model W End Seals or equivalent.

K. Pipe Insulation: Cellular glass block or mineral fiber preformed insulation in accordance with ASTM C547 or ASTM C552. Foamglas®36 by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

L. Threaded Pipe Joint Sealant: Permabond®37 MH052 or approved substitute.

M. Solder: Lead-free type. 35 Garlock is a registered trademark of Garlock Sealing Technologies LLC, Palmyra, New York. 36 Foamglas is a registered trademark of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. 37 Permabond is a registered trademark of Loxeal srl, Italy.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 257 of 297


33 10 00 – 9

N. Raw Water Filters: Filter Specialists, Inc. Liquid Bag Filters, Model FSPN-250 #6-3” Flange, Dwg. 1901747. 316 Stainless Steel, hinged lid, 150-lb raised face flanges, ASME Section VIII Division 1 stamped, 150 psi @ 250°F, 800 micron, polypropylene filter bags. Contact: Gary Schulz, Control Factors – Portland, Inc., 503-669-1185.

O. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: The Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be ASSE Listed 1013 and AWWA Compliant C511 and supplied with Clow R/W Model 2640 (FxF) – full port OS&Y gate valves. The main body and access cover shall be epoxy coated ductile iron (ASTM A536 Grade 4), the seat ring and check valve shall be NORYL™38, the stem shall be Stainless Steel (ASTM A276) and the seat disc elastomers shall be EPDM. The internals shall be series 300 Stainless Steel. The checks and the relief valve shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from the line. The Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be a ZURN WILKINS®39 Model 375. The Reduced Pressure Backflow assembly shall be fully assembled at the factory and shipped for field installation. Products shall be listed on the Department of Health Approved Assemblies List with the Washington State Department of Health.

P. Water Inlet Pressure Control Valve: The Pressure Reducing Control Valve with Low Flow By-Pass shall be a pilot operated diaphragm valve designed to automatically reduce a fluctuating higher upstream pressure to a constant lower downstream pressure regardless of varying flow rates. Assembly shall be a globe style with all internal cast components CF8M (316) Stainless Steel with a 250 psi rating. The valve shall be Watts ACV Model 3” F115-74, 150# flanged raised-face, EPDM seal, with low flow by-pass.

Q. Five-valve Block and Bleed Manifold: Valve manifold for differential pressure transmitter across the filter canisters shall be a 5 valve with 2 test ports, a vent valve, and 2 equalize valves (as shown in Fig. 1). Unit shall be Stainless Steel with hard seats and 1/2” FPT inlet and outlet ports in the configuration shown in the diagram to the right. Assembly part number shall be a PGI International M-502-SCT.

R. Differential Pressure Transmitter: Pressure transmitter for the filters shall be a 4-20mA with communication, Stainless Steel wetted parts, 1/2” FPT process connections, and a 5 to 500 kPa range. Part number shall be a Yokogawa®40 EJA110E-JHS4G 912DN/FF1.

38 NORTL is a trademark of Sabic Global Technologies B.V., Netherlands. 39 ZURN WILKINS is a registered trademark of Zurco, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware. 40 Yokogawa is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation, Tokyo, Japan.

Figure 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 258 of 297


33 10 00 – 10

S. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range, and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft™41 45-1109-SD-04L-0/300#.

T. Thermal Expansion (Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be Hydropads®42 as manufactured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm-type Stainless Steel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be exposed internally to line pressure and all material in contact with line fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unit shall have sufficient volume between bellows and other shell to limit pulsation to values noted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID. Assembly shall be either model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet) or part number 320500 (32 in³) (threaded inlet).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. All underground utility locations shall be identified by means of marking tape. Place tape in backfill directly above the utility line at approximately 12-in. below grade.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings

1. Install pipe and pipe accessories in accordance with AWWA C600 (Ductile Iron), ASTM A234 (Steel), manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 24, UPC, the drawings, and this Section.

2. Install thrust restraint at all bends, tees, plugs, and caps in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8-6. If concrete thrust blocks are used, size in accordance with details shown on the contract drawings.

3. Fabricate and install Stainless Steel welded pipe and fittings and components in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

4. Make joints in threaded piping system with specified joint sealant. Apply sealant to male threads only.

41 Ashcroft is a trademark of Ashcroft Inc., Stratford, Connecticut. 42 Hydropads is a registered trademark of Güntner GmbH & Co., Germany.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 259 of 297


33 10 00 – 11

5. Coat buried carbon steel accessories, such as tie-rods and clamps, with 16.0 mils of Bitumastic in one or two coats (10-24 hours between coats). Allow 8 hours for Bitumastic to dry before backfilling.

6. Painting and Markings: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” for preparation and painting.

B. Valve Orientation




C. Sewer Drain Piping

1. Slope line 1/8 in. per ft (minimum) or as specified on drawings.

2. Install ABS or PVC pipeline in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the drawings. In-line service testing of sewer pipe is permitted.

D. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer

1. Install in accordance with WAC 246-290 recognized cross-connection control manual installation specifications including but not limited to the specifications found in “Cross Connection Control Manual, Accepted Procedures and Practices,” “Manual of Cross-Connection Control” or AWWA M14.

E. Flanged Joints

1. Install flanges in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittings and valves being joined.

3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installed with flange of receiving pipe, fitting, or valve.

4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so that flanges are properly aligned.

5. Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts.

6. Clean gasket of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for damage/defects.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 260 of 297


33 10 00 – 12

F. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and with applicable recommended procedures of MSS-SP-58.

G. Weld Identification

1. Prepare weld identification drawings, isometric or spool, using existing project Drawings as applicable which show relative positions of pressure-containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components.

2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.

3. Do not reuse weld numbers. If a weld is completely replaced, assign a new number.

4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).





B. Raw Water Line Flushing

1. Flush raw water in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, for below ground piping.

a. The underground pipe trench shall be partially backfilled between joints before testing to prevent movement of pipe.

b. Notify Project Engineer at least five working days before flushing of piping system for witnessing flush. Flushing to verify that new lines are clean and acceptable.

c. Flush piping with water for five minutes minimum, and until effluent is clean and contains no visible particulate matter. Flushing pressure shall not exceed maximum operating pressure specified for the system. Flushing water supply shall have sufficient capacity to produce a full pipe (largest pipe size) flush.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 261 of 297


33 10 00 – 13

d. Document flushing of each piping system on NFPA Form “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and Underground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.



1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Perform visual examination (VT) on all completed welds in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

4. Examination Documentation

a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual examinations and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.




5. Final closure welds that cannot be isolated for testing shall be examined in-process.

B. Raw Water Line Testing

1. Furnish instruments, facilities, and labor required to conduct tests.

2. Test gauges shall be calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times test pressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 262 of 297


33 10 00 – 14

3. Document leak/pressure testing of each piping system on NFPA Form “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground or Underground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and submit in accordance with 1.3.

4. Perform tests after lines have been flushed and before joints have been backfilled for underground piping.

5. Remove all air from piping and adequately restrain pipe prior to hydrostatic test for underground piping. The last thrust block poured shall have cured a minimum of 7 days prior to test.

6. Test mainline at 200 psi for two hours or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum static pressure and measure leakage of raw water lines in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9, for underground piping. Service test trailer piping less than 3 in., use full mainline pressure for at least 30 minutes with no visible leaks or loss of test water. Repair any unsatisfactory joints and retest.

7. Install a temporary relief valve during pressure test. Relief valve shall have a discharge capacity of at least 125 percent of the pressurizing device and be set to not more than 110 percent of the test pressure. Demonstrate proper operation of relief valve before relief valve is attached to system for leak test and whenever there is cause to question operating accuracy of valve.

C. Sewer Line Testing

1. Before connecting to existing manhole, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Document test results.

D. For Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer, verify and document the following characteristics by visual inspection:

1. Device is installed in its proper orientation.

2. Device has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 263 of 297


40 05 13 – 1

SECTION 40 05 13

PROCESS PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of inside water piping beginning after the backflow preventer and of outdoor below and above grade water piping from the Air and Water Service Building to the Tank Farm Process Piping manifolds.





ANSI/ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing

Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Service Piping

C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 264 of 297


40 05 13 – 2


ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges

ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes


ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts



AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel


F. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)

MSS-SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends

G. Hanford Documents




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 265 of 297


40 05 13 – 3

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use start of fabrication, submit two copies of each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

2. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication, submit two copies of welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.

3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit two copies of documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for information/record.

4. Mechanical Cleaning Verification: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.3.B for information/record.

5. Weld Examinations as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.

6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit two copies of testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.


1. Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): With delivery, submit two copies of legible reports, certified by responsible manufacturer of materials used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, flanges, and weld filler material for the individual pipe sections listed below. Reports shall present results of chemical analysis and physical tests specified in ASME, ASTM, or AWS Codes or Standards as applicable and Standard Specifications for production lots and heats of materials. Submit separate reports for the individual pipe sections.

2. Material traceability shall be maintained through fabrication for material requiring CMTRs.


A. Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 266 of 297


40 05 13 – 4

B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.

a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

C. Qualification of Pressure Boundary Welders

1. For low-pressure systems, personnel and procedures for welding pressure-retaining components, along with attachments hereto, shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX, except as modified by ASME B31.9, Chapter V, Section 927.6.

D. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Sec V as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1. Qualification of Nondestructive Examination (NDE) personnel:

a. Visual weld examinations shall be performed and appropriate documentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification in accordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding Inspections (CAWIs), certified in accordance with above standard, may perform examinations when under immediate direction of CWIs.

b. Personnel performing other NDE of welds shall be certified in accordance with written practice, which shall meet requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret test results.

2. Welding-related examination documentation shall be signed or stamped by individuals performing examinations.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 267 of 297


40 05 13 – 5

E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS






PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and Components List section below.

B. Pipe Supports: See details specified on the Drawings and in Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications.” U-bolts to be Stainless Steel or plastic coated.

C. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints. Use anaerobic acrylic sealer: Henkel Corporation: Loctite®43 5452 or 272. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specification.

D. Protective Coating for below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Field-applied exterior epoxy protection system, Carboline Plasite 4550 or approved substitute, 25 mils minimum dry thickness, per manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Valves: Specified in the Components List section below, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

F. Hoses: UFBX1 T316L hose, with series 300 SS braid, and with T304L Schedule 40S pipe ends for socket welding. Lengths, reducers, and 90° long and short radius elbows, as shown on the Drawings, and within the specifications of B31.9. Each hose description in the Bill of Materials on the Drawings is described in order of hose assembly. All lengths shall be ±1/4” of the indicated dimension on

43 Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 268 of 297


40 05 13 – 6

the Drawings. Hose braid collars shall be 3/4” long for 1” hose and 1” long for 1.5”, 2”, and 3” hose. Long and short radius elbows shall be according to ASME B16.9 dimensions. Pipe end dimensions called out on the Drawings are intentionally long. Field verify dimensions, and cut to length during installation as required. Follow all manufacturers’ specifications, especially the minimum live length for vibration, minimum static bend radius, and maximum offset.

G. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified in the Components List section below.

H. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

I. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

J. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protectoin for Underground and Submerged Piping.”

K. Anchors:

1. Concrete Anchor Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Cast-In-Place Concrete.”

2. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

3. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Thermal Expansion (Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be Hydropads as manufactured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm-type Stainless Steel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be exposed internally to line pressure and all material in contact with line fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unit shall have sufficient volume between bellows and other shell to limit pulsation to values noted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID. Assembly shall be either model 22 (200 in³) (socket weld inlet), model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet), or part number 320500 (32 in³) (threaded inlet).

B. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range, and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft 45-1109-SD-04L-0/300#.

C. Flow Orifice: Flow orifices for outside building accessory lines shall be a 2” O-ring union with orifice insert sized to approximately 11/16 in., Class 3000,

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 269 of 297


40 05 13 – 7

socket weld and Stainless Steel. Hart Industries, p/n O-3333-8-E-304L. Orifice shall be sized for the flow specified on the P&ID and adjusted accordingly.

D. Leak detector elements as indicated in the Drawings.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.

2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.9.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Stainless Steel piping shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate with Project/System Engineer for delivery of items to Site.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 270 of 297


40 05 13 – 8

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Fabricate and install pipe and fittings and components in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

B. Valve Orientation




C. Identification

1. An identification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment, valves, and components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be used on a Stainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment identification number (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.

2. Piping Identification: Identify in-building and above grade piping systems as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ASME B13.1 and also Attachment 1.

D. Pipe

1. Cut pipe using methods that result in clean, straight cuts.

2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs before assembly.

3. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system.

4. Install piping with slope specified on the Drawings.

5. Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into alignment for joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components is prohibited.

E. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.

F. Flanged Joints

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 271 of 297


40 05 13 – 9

1. Install flanges in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittings and valves being joined.

3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installed with flange of receiving pipe, fitting, or valve.

4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so that flanges are properly aligned.

5. Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts.

6. Clean gasket of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for damage/defects.

G. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and with applicable recommended procedures of MSS-SP-58.

H. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

I. Tools marked for Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainless Steel only. Tools previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on Stainless Steel. Areas on Stainless Steel pipe that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of all free iron.

J. Below Grade Piping:

1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00 “Excavation and Backfill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

3. At piping bends provide cushions for thermal expansion according to Section 40 42 00, Paragraph 2.2.B.

K. Exterior Protective Coating:

1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.

2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe and fittings with coating specified in Paragraph 2.2.D in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 272 of 297


40 05 13 – 10

3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Do not install below grade insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

L. Welding

1. Weld piping and attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Use of backing rings is not permitted.

3. Complete piping welds before tie-in welds to fixed items.

4. Weld steel structural elements in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.6.

M. Weld Identification

1. Prepare weld identification drawings, isometric or spool, using existing project Drawings as applicable which show relative positions of pressure-containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components.

2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.

3. Do not reuse weld numbers. If a weld is completely replaced, assign a new number.

4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).

N. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing, and connecting of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.

O. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 273 of 297


40 05 13 – 11


B. Cleaning and Flushing

1. After examination is complete and before pressure testing system, or before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping internal surfaces by mechanical cleaning.

2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the Project/System Engineer until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

a. When high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressure testing will not be performed immediately after cleaning, remove all water.

b. Use drain taps at low point of piping system to ensure complete drainage and drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain cleanliness.

3. Provide documented evidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished as specified in this Section.



1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

4. Examination Documentation

a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual examinations and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 274 of 297


40 05 13 – 12




5. Final closure welds that cannot be isolated for testing shall be examined in-process.

B. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times test pressure.

2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.

3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.

4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.

5. Install necessary restraining devices, before applying test pressure, to prevent distortion or displacement of piping. Remove temporary restraining devices following testing.

6. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures.

7. Visually examine piping joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources, including welds that attach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems, during testing.

8. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 275 of 297


40 05 13 – 13

9. Purge air from piping systems during filling, before applying pressure.

10. Continuously maintain test pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine joints and connections. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.

11. Remove water from piping systems after testing using low point drains or by applying low air pressure at connection points and blowing down the lines.

12. Perform leak/pressure testing in accordance with ASME B31.9, Chapter VI, Section 937, and this Section.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Schedule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing

NDE/NDT Method Raw Water Piping

Legend: A. All completed welds to haveof visual

examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld inspector shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1 and fulfill the minimum requirements.

B. Full penetration welds on branch connections.

C. Attachment welds to pipe. D. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.

Visual A Fit A Root Pass A Cover Pass A Liquid Penetrant Root Pass Cover Pass Magnetic Particle Root Pass Cover Pass Radiographic Completed Weld Ultrasonic Completed Weld Leak/Pressure Completed Weld B, C, D Other

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 276 of 297


40 05 13 – 14

B. Components List

Service Design Pressure (psig)

Hydrostatic Test Pressure (psig)

Design Temp (°F)

Inlet and Cold Water Discharge up to Manifold Piping 150 225 140

Cold Water Discharge Piping (Inside – after the Manifold,

Below Grade, or Above Grade Outside)

150 225 180

Hot Water Inlet and Recirculation Piping 250 375 140

Hot Water Discharge Piping (Inside, Below Grade, or Above

Grade Outside) 250 375 180

Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. & larger Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless Wall Thickness

Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if indicated as threaded on the Drawings).

Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings

Integrally reinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS-SP-97

Unions Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, threaded or socket welded in accordance with ASME B16.11.

O-ring Unions

304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000, Manufacturer: Hart Industries.

304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000, Manufacturer: Hart Industries.

Ball Valves (2 way)

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

None.

Globe Valves

None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351, Class 300, OS&Y bonnet, plug type disc, socket weld ends, Aloyco figure 2314

Gate Valves

See associated Drawings.

Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside location: either Below Grade or Above Grade).

Heat Trace On any outside piping whether below or above grade. See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 277 of 297


40 05 13 - Att. 1-1

SECTION 40 05 13– ATTACHMENT 1

IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

Identification of piping systems shall be in accordance with the American Standard Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI/ASME A13.1, as supplemented herein, and with TFC-ENG-STD-12, “Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard.”

2. LOCATION

a. Except as provided below, identification shall be located adjacent to outlets, valves, flanges, unions, changes-in-direction, where pipes through walls, floors, or ceilings, and along an uninterrupted length of pipe at maximum intervals of 50 ft. Each line or branch in shall have a least one identification.

b. Where a number of outlets, valves, flanges, unions, or changes of direction make identification at each item impracticable, they may be spaced at approximate 6-ft intervals, preferably adjacent to valves.

c. Legend shall be located on pipe so that it can be read easily from operator’s normal viewing position. Labels shall be placed on readily visible lower quadrant of overhead pipes, an on an upper quadrant of pipes below normal eye level.

3. LEGEND

a. Positive identification of piping system content shall be by lettered legend giving name of content in full or abbreviated form. Legends may also be as specified on the Drawings or in other specifications.

b. Abbreviation of words in legend may be used only where unavoidable due to space limitations.

c. Legend shall include nominal operating pressure and/or temperature when specified.

d. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed near legend on pipes normally having a flow in 1 direction only. Color and size of arrow shall be consistent with color and size of legend letters.

e. Legend shall be located on or adjacent to classification color band.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 278 of 297


40 05 13 - Att. 1-2

4. APPROVED LABELS

a. Legend and color classification may be accomplished by use of approved labels that conform to this Standard and are suitable for temperature of surface to which they are applied. Approved labels include the following:

Stock System #4 Pipe Markers www.pipemarker.com Brimar Industries P.O. Box 467 / 64 Outwater Lane Garfield NJ 07026 Ph: 800-274-6271 High Performance Pipe Markers www.bradyid.com Brady WORLDWIDE 6555 W. Good Hope Rd Milwaukee, WI 53223

b. Single-word labels may be combined to form complete legends. Individual-letter labels shall not be combined.

c. Labels shall be installed after painting is complete.

5. CLASSIFICATION COLOR shall conform to ANSI/ASME A13.1

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 279 of 297


40 05 22 - 1

SECTION 40 05 22

HOSE IN HOSE TRANSFER LINE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The HIHTL will be located within the 241 AX Tank Farm, 241 AZ Tank Farm, and the intra-farm area between the two tank farms. The HIHTL system will connect the 241 AX waste retrieval equipment to a portable above ground valve box assembly within the 241 AX tank farm and from the valve box to designated connections in the 241 AZ tank farm. The furnished HIHTL assemblies will consist of a flexible primary hose installed within a secondary encasement hose. The primary hose will be wrapped with heat tape and the secondary hose with insulation to prevent significant cooling of the conveyed fluid as it flows through the assembly, minimizing the risk of plugging.




A. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)

RMA IP-2 Hose Handbook, Washington D.C.


TFC-ENG-STD-21 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

B31.3, 2012 Process Piping

D. A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D380 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Hose

E. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulations

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 280 of 297


40 05 22 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit two copies of testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.B and 3.4.A.


1. Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): With delivery, submit two copies of legible reports, certified by responsible manufacturer of materials used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, flanges, and weld filler material for the individual pipe sections listed below. Reports shall present results of chemical analysis and physical tests specified in ASME, ASTM, or AWS Codes or Standards as applicable and Standard Specifications for production lots and heats of materials. Submit separate reports for the individual pipe sections.

2. Material traceability shall be maintained through fabrication for material requiring CMTRs.


A. Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

C. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection methods for HIHTL assemblies.

D. Obtain and conspicuously post the following permits before starting work under this Section.





B. Storage of the HIHTL materials shall be in accordance with the following:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 281 of 297


40 05 22 - 3

1. Hose assembly shall be stored as shipped, on reel, in either vertical or horizontal position.

2. Hose assembly should be stored in its original shipping/packing materials so that plastic wrapping and cardboard covering will provide some protection against possible deteriorating elements. Additionally, if stored outside, the material shall be covered with a tarpaulin or other protective covering.

3. Hose ends shall be kept covered by wrapping in plastic and securing.

4. Exposure to direct and reflected sunlight should be avoided. If the hose is exposed to the sun for a prolonged period, a section of hose should be inspected for deterioration every two years. Inspect hose for any damage to or holes in insulation and inspect fittings for visible damage.

5. Optimum storage area is in a covered area that is cool and dark, and free of dampness and mildew.

6. Maximum shelf life is 7 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, HIHTL system materials, including the portable valve box, will be Government Furnished Equipment (GFE).

1. The HIHTL is classified as Safety Significant.

2. HIHTLs shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-21.

B. Bolt thread lubricant (high stress compound, anti-seize).

C. Calibrated torque wrenches.

D. Protective Coating for below grade Stainless Steel fittings: Field-applied exterior epoxy protection system, Carboline Plasite 4550 or approved substitute, 25 mils minimum dry thickness, per manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Shielding materials as indicated on Drawings.

F. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 282 of 297


40 05 22 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine designated routing for the HIHTL systems and notify Project/System Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed and/or corrected

B. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection methods for HIHTL assemblies.

C. Prepare routing path and tie-in connections for installation of HIHTL assemblies. Coordinate with Project/System Engineer for delivery of materials to the site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install HIHTL assemblies, supports, anchors and insulation as shown on the Drawings.

B. Use care in unwrapping plastic and cardboard to avoid damage to hose, fittings, and heat trace.

C. If a spindle is used to unroll hose, provisions must be in place to slow the reel as it unwinds to control the roll off of the hose.

D. Never pull on HIHTL assemblies by the ends alone. Use a choker strap at some point along the hose length.

E. If temperatures have been below 32ºF, the hose may be stiff and require warming before installation. Notify Project/System Engineer for instructions if warming is required.

F. Leave assembly connections covered and protected until in place to actually connect assembly to equipment.

G. Connect primary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per manufacturer’s directions.

1. Primary hose connections are male to female ChemJoint.

2. The male and female threads have been treated with Everlube, a dry film lubricant. No additional lubricant or anti-seize material should be applied.

3. The o-ring should have one white and two yellow dots visible indicating it is the specified material, EPDM.

4. Verify cleanliness, correct o-ring, and then join the hose assembly.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 283 of 297


40 05 22 - 5

5. Torque for the ChemJoint fitting is 200 ft-lbs or hand tight plus 1 to 1-1/2 notches of the nut. Contact Project/System Engineer for clarification on turn of the nut torque method from vendor information.

6. Apply set screws and tighten with 1/8-inch Allen wrench to the point that the ChemJoint nut cannot turn.

H. Test primary hose in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.

I. Prior to final joining of secondary hose connections, verify heat trace is spliced and/or heat trace lead is clear of the joint and available for termination.

J. Connect secondary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per manufacturer’s directions.

1. Secondary hose connections will be one of two types. One joint will be flange connector consisting of 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would bolt directly to a mating flange on equipment/valve box. The other joint will be a threaded union end connector consisting of a 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would connect to another hose assembly and/or equipment.

2. Make both of these connections in accordance with details shown on the Drawings.

3. Verify cleanliness of the visible area of hose and connection.

4. Apply approved lubricant to flange bolt threads and tighten in sequence that uniformly loads the gasket. For connections using raised face flanges with EPDM gaskets, final torque bolts to 40 ft-lbs.

K. Below Grade HIHTL

1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00 “Excavation and Backfill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

3. At piping bends provide cushions for thermal expansion according to Section 40 42 00, Paragraph 2.2.B.

L. Exterior Protective Coating:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 284 of 297


40 05 22 - 6

1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.

2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe and fittings with coating specified in Paragraph 2.2.D in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Do not install below grade insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”


A. Notify Project/System Engineer prior to installation of HIHTL for witnessing of activities by Independent Qualified Registered Professional Engineer (IQRPE), as required by WAC 173-303.

B. Perform visual inspection of encasement hose for damage. Minor cosmetic damage to the insulation is acceptable. If visible damage is present, inspect for potential leak paths and notify Project/System Engineer. If suspect, remove hose from service and retest.

C. Inspect the HIHTL assembly connections are clean and free of debris.

D. Inspect the hose assemblies and connections described in Paragraph 3.2. Verify final connections have been properly assembled and torqued.

E. Refer to Section 40 41 00 for heat trace testing requirements.

F. Perform visual inspection of equipment insulation for excessive damage. Minor cosmetic damage to the insulation is acceptable. Record results.

G. Verify a minimum of 2 inch of soil cover is in place above the hose assembly prior to installation of cover plates.


A. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect HIHTL against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 285 of 297


40 05 22 - 7

2. Joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.

3. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures

4. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.

5. Primary Hose

Note: Leak testing per this section will be performed on components that have already been hydrostatically tested as subassemblies per ASME B31.3.

a. Test using one of the following methods for each primary hose connection, at Project/System Engineer direction.

i Perform hydrostatic pressure test of primary hose at 200 +/- 5 psig. Maintain pressure for 10 minutes and verify no leakage at connections. Record Results. If heat trace on the hose is not active, remove water from the lines (i.e. blow down the lines) after completion of the test to prevent freeze damage.

ii Perform pneumatic pressure test of the primary hose at 10 +/- 2 psig. Maintain pressure for 10 minutes. Apply soap bubble solution to ensure no leakage at connections and any other location specified by the Project/System Engineer/Test Engineer. Record results. The PRV shall be set at ≤ 50 psig. The systems have a minimum design pressure of 400 psig (or greater) and therefore a PRV setting of 50 psig does not pose a safety concern.

b. When determined that neither of the two above methods are practical for a particular configuration, a leak test shall be performed to verify no leakage at the connection. Testing criteria will be determined by the responsible engineer. Perform a final visual examination of the joint configuration/ makeup to verify it conforms to the drawings.

6. Secondary Hose

a. Perform pneumatic pressure test of the encasement hose at 10 +/- 2 psig. Maintain pressure for 10 minutes. Apply soap bubble solution to ensure no leakage at connections and any other location specified by the Project/System Engineer/Test Engineer. Where isolation of a connection is not possible, perform a final visual examination of the joint configuration/makeup to verify it

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 286 of 297


40 05 22 - 8

conforms to the Drawings. Record results. The PRV shall be set at ≤ 50 psig. The secondary hoses have a minimum design pressure of 60 psig (or greater) and therefore a PRV setting of 50 psig does not pose a safety concern.

7. Document testing of each HIHTL system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each system. Under “Description” describe HIHTL system in enough detail for correlation to Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.

END OF SECTION

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 287 of 297


40 41 00 - 1

SECTION 40 41 00

PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HEAT TRACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Installation and testing of above and below grade water and process piping heat tracing.





ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems




TFC-ENG-STD-02 Environmental and Seasonal Requirements for TOC Systems, Structures, and Components

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Submit test procedures to be used with acceptance criteria prior to testing.

2. Submit records of inspections, tests, and adjustments described in 3.3.


1. Catalog Data: With delivery, submit two copies of catalog data for heater cable, thermostat, controls, fittings, indicator lights, and pipe markers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 288 of 297


40 41 00 - 2

2. Includes rated capacities, operating characteristics, specialties, and accessories.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: With delivery, submit two copies of operation and maintenance instructions.

4. Warranty: Manufacturer agreement for replacement of electric heating cable due to failure in materials or workmanship.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Products shall be obtained from qualified suppliers, meeting NEC requirements, or be commercial grade items (CGI) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this Section. Commercial grade dedication will be performed by Buyer.



B. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General

1. Furnish electric heat tracing system(s) as shown on the Drawings with all components, controls, and accessories required for a complete and operating system.

2. Self-Regulating, Parallel-Resistance Heating Cable System

3. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 120V. Raychem 5BTV1-CT.

4. End Seal Kit. Raychem E-150.

5. Power Connection box with Red Indicating Light. Raychem JBM-100-L-A.

6. Splice Kit. Raychem S-150.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 289 of 297


40 41 00 - 3

7. Tee, above grade. Raychem T-100.

8. Glass Tape. Raychem GS-54.

B. Pipe Markers: Furnish pipe markers with the words “ELECTRIC TRACED” printed with UV-stable black ink on a durable yellow background. Meet the requirements of the ASME (ANSI) A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems and also Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping” Attachment 1. Provide materials and styles that are suitable for outdoor environments.

C. Piping: See Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping.”

D. Insulation: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Surfaces to receive heat tracing shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, scale, rust, and other foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost during installation of heat trace cable.

2. Ensure surfaces and pipe in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.

B. Heat tracing cabling shall fit within the piping insulation as shown on the Drawings.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Heat trace piping in accordance with individual pipe sections listed in Paragraph 3.5 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” and TFC-ENG-STD-02.

2. Install electric heating cable according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and in accordance with NECA 202.

3. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 290 of 297


40 41 00 - 4

4. Install heater cable to allow easy removal on maintenance items such as pumps, valves, strainers, or filters.

5. Waterproof all terminations and electrical connections.

6. Attach heater cable directly to the pipe using the heating cable manufacturer’s adhesive backed glass fiber tape at 1-ft intervals.

7. Connect wiring in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

8. Ground equipment in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

9. Notify Buyer after heat trace cabling has been applied, and prior to backfilling or installing insulation on the piping. Obtain approval from Buyer prior to beginning backfill or covering piping.

10. Perform examination on connecting of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.

11. Install insulation over piping with electric heating cables in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

12. Install signs at maximum 20-ft intervals along pipe insulation reading: “ELECTRIC TRACED.” Install labels so they will be visible during normal operations.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform tests after cable installation but before application of insulation or covering.

2. Test cable for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.

3. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe mounted cables.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Remove and replace damaged heat trace cables.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 291 of 297


40 41 00 - 5

F. Protect installed heat trace cables from damage during construction.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 292 of 297


40 42 00 - 1

SECTION 40 42 00

PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Installation of above and below grade insulation and jacketing systems.





ASME NQA-1, 2008 with 2009 Addenda Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications


ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C795 Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. None.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 293 of 297


40 42 00 - 2


1. Certificate of Conformance: With delivery, submit a legible certificate stating that the insulation materials meet the requirements of the Drawings and this Section.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Documents and records for the insulation jacket examinations as described in 3.4.B.1 shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.

1.5 PERMITS

A. Obtain and conspicuously post the following permit before starting work under this Section.

1. Hot Work Permit: See the Contract Statement of Work



B. Deliver insulation and associated adhesives to site in manufacturer’s containers with manufacturer’s stamp or label clearly shown.

C. Protect insulation and associated components against dirt, water, and chemical damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Inside and Outside Above Grade Piping Insulation System:

1. Armaflex AP flexible expanded closed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534 Grade 1. Thermal conductivity of 0.256 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 90°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.

2. Outer covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone rubber (min temp resistance 500° F), secured with Hook and Loop fasteners or similar

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 294 of 297


40 42 00 - 3

(do not use aluminum wire) according to manufacturer’s specifications. All horizontal joints to be on the bottom.

3. Flashing compound: Non-shrinking, flexible, clear, 94% non-volatile, for service temperatures of -30°F through 250°F, RTV silicone.

B. Below Grade Pipe Insulation System:

1. Insulation shall be Foamglas insulation, ASTM C 552, “Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation,” by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. Thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 50°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.

2. The pipe and fittings outer covering insulation jacket shall be PITTWRAP®44 SS jacketing (FI-179A) with sealant PITTSEAL®44 727 (FI-255) by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

3. Oversized insulation shall be at least 2” thick, of the same material as described in 2.2.B.1 above, per Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed on the Drawings.

4. Support blocks within oversized insulation shall be procured/fabricated as specified in Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed on the Drawings.

2.3 MATERIAL QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products shall be obtained from qualified suppliers, or be commercial grade items (CGIs) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this Section. Commercial grade dedication will be performed by Buyer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive insulation shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, scale, rust, and foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost during application of insulation.

B. Verify that examination and leak/pressure testing of line or pipe spools have been completed, and installation of heat tracing has been completed, as applicable.

C. Verify that insulation is configured to accommodate the heat trace as shown on the Drawings.

D. All standing water shall be removed from underground trenches prior to installing insulation.

44 PITTWRAP and PITTSEAL are registered trademarks of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 295 of 297


40 42 00 - 4

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. The adhesives of self-adhesive labels, tape, and marking materials used for temporary marking of Stainless Steel shall contain less than 210 ppm total halogens (free and chemically combined).

2. Warning tape should be applied on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.

B. Cracked or broken insulation shall be replaced or repaired as required in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect to be certain there are no openings or pinholes in the jacketing.

C. Apply insulation over welds after weld examination, satisfactory leak testing, and application of epoxy coating.

D. Heat Tracing: Ensure heat trace is installed as specified on the Drawings and per Section, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing” 40 41 00.

E. Insulation shall be applied over the electrical heat tracing and secured using glass fiber reinforced tape. Pipe insulation shall accommodate the heat trace cable shown on Drawings.

F. Above Grade Piping Insulation System

1. Install over joints only after NDE and leak/pressure testing of line has been completed.

2. Insulate valves using removable insulation pads, and any fittings not accommodated with straight jacketed pipe insulation.

G. Below Grade Piping Insulation System

1. Install insulation and jacketing per the manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure that the all joints and seams are properly sealed.

2. Verify piping is supported, anchored, and guided as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings.

3. Backfill insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the Drawings.

4. Expansion loops, piping supports, and fill in the bends and expansion loops shall be as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 296 of 297


40 42 00 - 5

3.3 INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Piping Insulation Schedule:

Table 1. Piping

(see Section 40 05 13, “Process

Piping”) Location Design

Temperature

Required Insulation Thickness

Insulation Purpose

“Hot Water” Inside See Section 40 05 13,

“Process Piping” Paragraph 3.5

3/8” Incidental Human Contact

“Cold Water” Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection “Cold Water” Above Grade 1” “Hot Water” Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection &

Maintain Process Temperature “Hot Water” Above Grade 1”

Process Air Below Grade See Section 22 15 00

None, except for bends

Thermal expansion compensation


A. Cleaning

1. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, or other mechanical method approved by the Buyer until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

B. Examinations

1. Insulation Jacket: Visually examine all laps, seams, and field applied coated areas to ensure that these areas are sealed from water entry in accordance with this Specification and product data sheets.


END OF SPECIFICATION

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.02 11/25/2015 - 9:04 AM 297 of 297

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP … · RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 2 iii Section No. of Pages...

Documents

Transcript of DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP … · RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 2 iii Section No. of Pages...